JP2020078636A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: specific display means for performing a specific display in which a display mode can be changed stepwise in accordance with the degree of advantage; and special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance for executing either a success performance or a failure performance after executing a common introduction performance. The specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display when a performance result of a predetermined performance is a specific result and a predetermined time period has elapsed. The special performance execution means does not execute the special performance in which the failure performance is executed but can execute the special performance in which the success performance is executed, in the time period from when it is shown that the performance result of the predetermined performance is the specific result to when the display mode of the specific display is changed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in Patent Document 1, after displaying a plurality of images as a specific display, it is notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed by combining the plurality of images, and the display mode of the specific display is changed. A gaming machine that executes an effect is disclosed.

JP, 2005-160056, A

  However, with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state,
A specific display means for performing a specific display capable of changing the display mode step by step according to the degree of advantage,
Special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game,
And a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that performs either a success effect or a failure effect after performing a common introduction effect,
The specific display means is capable of changing the display mode of the specific display when the effect of the predetermined effect is the specific result and a predetermined period of time has passed,
The special effect executing means executes the special effect in which the failure effect is performed during a period from when the effect result of the predetermined effect is shown to be a specific result to when the display mode of the specific display changes. Without, the special effect that the successful effect is performed is executable,
The special notification executing means,
Based on the fact that the abnormality is determined, it is possible to execute the abnormality notification as the special notification,
It is possible to start the abnormality notification even when the abnormality determination is performed in a predetermined period after being notified that the display result of the specific display becomes a specific result of the specific effect.
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(1) Other gaming machines,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.),
Present a plurality of selection candidates (for example, runners, etc.) (for example, make two runners appear in a race production), and select one of the presented selection candidates (for example, a race production To win one of the two runners), or a selection means that does not select any of them (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control),
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for performing a specific display production),
And a special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for making an abnormality notification),
As the selectable candidates that can be presented, a first selectable candidate (for example, a blue runner and a green runner (a runner of the first group) having a relatively low expectation of a big hit) and a first selectable candidate when selected. Also includes at least a plurality of second selection candidates having a high degree of advantage (eg, a big hit expectation degree) (eg, a red runner and a rainbow runner (a second group of runners) having a relatively high big hit expectation degree). ,
The selection means provides a plurality of presented selection candidates when the presented selection candidates do not include the first selection candidate (for example, when only a red runner or a rainbow runner appears in a race effect). A plurality of selection candidates are selected at a higher rate (for example, see FIGS. 20 and 21) than when the selection candidates include the first selection candidate (for example, when a blue or green runner appears in a race effect). Do not select any of the (for example, the pattern that both runners stop the race in the race production),
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period of time elapses after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, when the icon as the specific display is displayed, The specific display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed (the specific display changes, etc.),
The special notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed. It is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period after that),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production. In addition, it is possible to grasp the game situation even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The selection means can present a plurality of selection candidates at a plurality of timings including a first timing and a second timing (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
The ratio of selecting any of the plurality of selection candidates is different when the plurality of selection candidates that do not include the first selection candidate are presented at the first timing and when the plurality of selection candidates are presented at the second timing (for example, , See FIG. 21),
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further provided is a special effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for executing a special effect having a high degree of advantage (for example, one-shot notification),
When a plurality of selection candidates that do not include the first selection candidate are presented, one of the plurality of selection candidates when the special effect is executed is more than when the special effect is not executed. A high rate of selecting (for example, see FIG. 21),
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The advantage when no one of the plurality of selection candidates is selected is lower than the advantage when one of the plurality of selection candidates is selected (see, for example, FIGS. 20 and 21),
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the player pays attention to whether or not the selection candidate is selected, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The selection means is
It is possible to present a plurality of selection candidates at a plurality of timings including the first timing and a second timing after the first timing (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
A plurality of selection candidates are presented so that the respective degrees of advantage of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the second timing are not lower than the degrees of advantage of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the first timing (for example, FIG. 21),
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
A specific display control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control in Modification 1) capable of stepwise changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, meter M or the like) according to the degree of advantage;
After performing a common introduction effect (for example, an effect that displays the card G and "pseudo-repeat?"), succeeding effect (for example, turn over the card G, and turn over the flipped card G, the word "pseudo-repeat" is written. Execute a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-interconnection effect) that performs any one of a certain effect) and a failure effect (for example, an effect in which the card G is turned over and the flipped card G has nothing written on it). A specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the modified example 1),
The specific effect executing means performs the specific effect (for example, a pseudo operation) in which the failure effect is performed in a predetermined period (for example, another effect execution restriction period) after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed. Restricting execution of continuous production (failure, etc.) (see, for example, FIG. 27),
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following (7) to (15). Conventionally, as a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and a game medium wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is set. When established, a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as “display symbol”) is variably displayed on a variably display device, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined game value is given based on the display result, a so-called variably display game. There is a pachinko machine that enhances the interest of the game. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbols in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained. For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has been in the jackpot game state has a special electric winning device called a special winning opening or attacker in an open state, which makes it extremely easy to win a game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, various types of effects that make the player expect the display result to be a specific display mode are executed before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device. As such a gaming machine, a display mode of a specific display is changed by displaying a plurality of images as a specific display and then combining the plurality of images as disclosed in JP-A-2005-160056. There is a gaming machine that performs the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display while notifying. However, in this gaming machine, if the information about the game is not notified within a predetermined period after the player recognizes that the display mode of the specific display is changed, the game situation cannot be grasped and the interest of the game is deteriorated. There is a risk. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the entertainment level of the game.

(7) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for performing a specific display production),
And a special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for making an abnormality notification),
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period of time elapses after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, when the icon as the specific display is displayed, The specific display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed (the specific display changes, etc.),
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed. It is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the game situation even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed, and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above,
Further provided is a special effect executing means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control for executing a pseudo-interconnection effect) capable of executing a special effect that performs either a success effect or a failure effect after performing a common introduction effect.
The specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display when the effect result of the predetermined effect is the specific result (for example, when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success, an icon as the specific display is displayed. Such),
The special effect executing means is configured such that the successful effect is executed at a high rate in a period from when the effect result of the predetermined effect is a specific result to when the display mode of the specific display changes. Executing a special effect (for example, determining the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect)
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(9) In the gaming machine of (7) or (8) above,
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display step by step by displaying different types of special images (for example, when a plurality of specific display effects are performed, the specific display effect is displayed step by step). Icons increase, etc.),
Depending on the combination of the displayed special images, one of a plurality of types of effects that are controlled in the advantageous state is executed at different ratios (for example, an icon to be displayed (combination of icons) is variably displayed). Depending on the result, it will be decided at a different ratio),
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, the player can pay attention to which special image is displayed.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) or (9) above,
There are a plurality of start timings of the predetermined effect, and the ratio of the effect result of the predetermined effect to the specific result varies depending on which timing the start time of the predetermined effect is (for example, depending on the execution timing of the predetermined effect). The ratio of the success of the specified result is different)
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the start timing of the predetermined effect.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (7) to (10) above,
Correspondence display means for performing correspondence display corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing active display),
A corresponding display changing means for changing the display mode of the corresponding display (a CPU 90120 for effect control for performing an active display change effect),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on the combination of the display mode of the corresponding display and the display mode of the specific display (for example, the display mode of the active display and the display mode of the specific display (the number or combination of icons)). The ratio of the variable display result being a "big hit" differs depending on the combination of
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (11) above,
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect for notifying the degree of advantage (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing reach effect of super reach),
A special change effect executing means capable of executing a special change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display when the specific effect is executed (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the special change effect), Further preparation,
The special change effect executing means can execute the special change effect in a mode prioritizing the specific effect (for example, interrupting the super reach effect and executing the special change effect).
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in a mode that has priority over the specific effect, so that the change in the mode of the specific display can be noticed even when the specific effect is executed.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (12) above,
A plurality of selection candidates are presented, and a selection unit capable of selecting any one of the presented selection candidates (for example, a production control CPU 90120 that executes a race production as a predetermined production) is provided.
The plurality of selection candidates include a first selection candidate and a second selection candidate having a higher advantage than the first candidate when selected (for example, the success expectation as a result of a predetermined effect is compared. Selection candidates belonging to the first group, which are relatively low, and selection candidates belonging to the second group, which have relatively high success expectations as a result of the predetermined effect),
When the first selection candidate is not included in the presented plurality of selection candidates, the selection unit is configured to select any of the plurality of selection candidates at a higher rate than when the presented plurality of selection candidates are included in the first selection candidate. Not selected (for example, the second cancellation rate is set higher than the first cancellation rate),
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (7) to (13) above,
The special notification execution means is capable of executing an abnormal display as the special notification based on an abnormality determination, and in the predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed. It is possible to start the abnormality display even when the abnormality determination is performed (for example, it is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period after being notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed),
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the error.

(15) In the gaming machine described in any one of (7) to (14) above,
The special notification execution means can update the display of the number of coins won as the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, the icon as the specific display is The number of coins won can be updated within a predetermined period after being notified that it will be displayed, etc.),
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the notification of the number of acquired balls.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as performance execution ratios (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) include that one is “0%”. But it's okay. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

  Further, in the present specification, “limitation” includes not only prohibition but also reduction of various ratios such as execution ratio.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in one embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the figure which shows one example of the production control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a starting winning determination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st special figure reservation storage part and a 2nd special figure reservation storage part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for losses. It is a figure which shows the process content example of command analysis process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution determination example of a one-time advance notice. It is a figure which shows the execution determination example of a race production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the color of the runner who appears in a race production, and a jackpot expectation degree. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of determination of the production pattern of a race production. It is a figure showing example 2 and 3 of determination of the production pattern of a race production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is the figure which shows the execution timing example of various productions. It is the figure which shows the production screen example of the race production. It is the figure which shows the production screen example of the race production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production screen of the modification 1. It is the figure which shows the example of execution timing and the other production execution restriction period etc of production. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a starting winning determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure reservation storage part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of specific display production execution setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a specific display production execution decision table and a specific display production execution mode decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an execution timing determination table. It is a timing chart showing the details of the specific display effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the specific display effect. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production execution setting processing. It is the figure which shows the constitution example of the announcement production execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the execution timing determination table referred in order to determine the execution timing of a notice production. It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when specific display production and failure production are executed. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when specific display production and success production are executed. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when specific display production and notice production are executed. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 52. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the player sets the effect setting at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 52. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when the race production is done as specified production. In the case where the specific display effect is performed, the meter display is changed from the normal mode to the display mode of the first stage, and the active display change effect is performed in which the active display is changed to the first mode according to the change of the meter display. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. The example of the production|presentation operation|movement in case the super reach production|presentation is independently performed is shown. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when specific display production and active display change production are executed when super reach production is executed. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when specific display production and active display change production are executed when super reach production is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a display mode in the case of setting the function of an auto button valid or invalid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by a long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an auto button function.

(Pachinko machine 1)
(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display of special symbols (also called special drawing) as special identification information of a plurality of types (also called special drawing game). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided. These are composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, changing (displaying variably) a plurality of types of special symbols by update display or the like (the same applies to variable symbols of other symbols described later). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived display) as a display result (variable display result) (the same applies to other variable displays described later). Note that scrolling, deformation, enlargement/reduction, or the like may be performed as the variation of the design (particularly, a decorative design described later).

  In the following, the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are "second special symbols". Also called. Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game".

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, it is possible to change a decorative pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern. The display is done. As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" In, variable display of decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) is performed.

  A display area 5H is also arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. In the display area 5H, a first hold display image (here, a circle image) and a second hold display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the special figure game (variable display of the decorative pattern) whose execution is suspended. Image) is displayed. The first hold display image shows the first special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) whose execution is held, and is displayed right-justified in the area on the left side of the display area 5H. The second hold display image shows the second special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) whose execution is held, and is displayed left-justified in the area on the right side of the display area 5H.

  In addition, the number of reserved special game is also referred to as the number of reserved special game storage. In particular, the number reserved for the first special figure game is referred to as the first special figure reserved storage number. The number reserved for the second special figure game is referred to as the second special figure reserved storage number. The number of the first reserved display images indicates the first reserved figure reserved storage number, and the number of the second reserved display images indicates the second reserved map reserved storage number. The first hold display image and the second hold display image may be collectively referred to as a hold display image.

  When the held 1st special figure game is executed (digested), each 1st held display image already displayed shifts to the right, and the rightmost 1st held display image The image corresponding to the illustrated game) is deleted. When the held second special figure game is executed (digested), each second held display image already displayed is shifted to the left, and the leftmost second held display image (digested second special image is displayed). The image corresponding to the illustrated game) is deleted.

  Moreover, the 1st reservation display device 25A and the 2nd reservation display device 25B for displaying the number of special figure reservation memory so that specification is possible are provided. Each of the first reserved display device 25A and the second reserved display device 25B is configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and displays the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number according to the number of lit LEDs. To do.

  Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning hole which is kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can always enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game ball enters the first start winning hole, the first start hole switch 22A (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entrance of the game ball is detected (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three) ), and the first special map game can be started.

  The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type hand having a pair of movable blades that are changed to a closed state in which the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2) for an ordinary electric accessory moves to a vertical position and an open state in which the tilted position is used. An object (normal electric accessory) is provided to form a second starting winning opening. In the normal variable winning ball device 6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece comes close to the normal winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning prize is obtained. It becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the mouth (also called the second start winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning port by setting the movable wing piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second). It is also said that the winning opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning port, the second start port switch 22B (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entry of the game ball is detected (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three) ), and the second special game can be started at the same time.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the special winning opening door, and the special winning opening door changes between an open state and a closed state. Form a special winning opening as an area.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is off, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (for example, You cannot pass it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, the count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entrance of the game ball is detected. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, for example.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and is a variable display of ordinary symbols (also called "general symbols" or "ordinary symbols") as plural kinds of normal identification information different from the special symbols. To do. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also referred to as ordinary figure game (also called "ordinary figure game").

  The ordinary figure game is executed based on that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 is turned on, whereby the passage of the game ball is detected.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area by a hit ball launching device. There is.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. The upper plate (striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the game board or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and sends a production control command to the production control board 12 for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game, a general figure game, etc.). (Including the function to do). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

  As an example, the CPU 103 executes the program stored in the ROM 101 to realize the function of the main board 11 (control of the progress of the game). At this time, various data (variation patterns, effect control commands, data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 101 is used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input and an output port for transmitting various signals.

  CPU103, through I/O105, 1st special design indicator 4A, 2nd special design indicator 4B, normal design indicator 20, 1st reservation indicator 25A, 2nd reservation indicator 25B, general figure reservation indication A signal for controlling (driving) the device 25C or the like is output to control them.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game medium passes or a game medium passes or from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and performs various kinds of control based on the received effect control commands. Has a function of executing the effect (including variable display of decorative patterns).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to realize the function of the effect control board 12 (execution of effect). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data used for the effect control pattern and data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The display control unit 123 outputs the video signal of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used when controlling the effect operation. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I/O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

  The sound control board 13 has a function of outputting sound (sound specified by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12.

  The lamp control board 14 has a function of turning on/off the game effect lamp 9 (turning on/off according to the drive content indicated by the electric decoration signal) based on the electric decoration signal from the effect control board 12.

  The image display device 5 includes a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and an EL panel, and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the image display device 5 via the I/O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images and the like are displayed on the image display device 5.

(Progress of games and production)
A game medium (game ball) is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the hit ball operation handle of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the passage gate 41, a general-purpose game (variable display of normal symbols) is started. In addition, when the general-purpose game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another general-purpose game is already running or during the opening control described below, the maximum amount of four general-purpose games is 4 Execution is suspended. The suspended general-purpose game is executed when the start condition for starting the general-purpose game is satisfied (eg, another general-purpose game is not executed and the opening control is not performed). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when the number of reserved universal figures stored has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved universal memories is not increased, and the passage is invalidated.

  The variable display results that are stopped and displayed in the universal figure game include a universal figure per symbol (for example, a regular figure such as "7") and a universal figure lost pattern (for example, a regular figure such as "-"). .. When the universal figure hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "universal figure hit". When the universal figure lost design is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "universal figure lost".

  In the case of "universal hit", the opening control (the second starting winning port is opened) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball device 6B is tilted for a predetermined period. In the case of "universal figure loss", the opening control is not performed.

  The first special figure game is started when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A. Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game is started. In addition, when the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already running or is being controlled to the jackpot gaming state described later, each of the four special figure games is four. Execution of the special figure game is suspended with the upper limit of the above. The suspended special figure game is executed when a start condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied (other special figure games are not executed, and the jackpot is not in a gaming state, etc.).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening when the first special figure reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the first special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be prize balls). When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening when the second special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit, the entry is invalidated without increasing the second special figure reservation storage number ( There may be prize balls).

  The entry (winning) of the game ball, which increases the number of the first special figure reserved memories, into the first starting winning opening is also called the first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the game ball, which increases the number of the second special figure reserved memories, into the second starting winning opening is also called the second starting winning. These prizes are collectively referred to simply as the starting prize.

  The variable display results stopped and displayed in the special figure game include a big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “3” and “7”) and a lost symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “−”). .. When the big hit symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is "big hit". When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "missed".

  When the variable display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is "big hit" (specific display result), the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the variable display result is "miss", the big hit game state is not controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened. The open state is until the earlier timing of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). Will continue. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply called "round"). In the big hit game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15 times”) is reached (the special winning opening is closed during the period other than the round game).

  In "big hit", big hit types such as "non-probable change" and "probable change" are set. When the jackpot type is "non-probable change", the jackpot symbol "3" is stopped and displayed. When the jackpot type is “probability change”, the jackpot pattern “7” is stopped and displayed.

  The "big hit" when the big hit type is "probable change" may be called "probable change big hit", and the "big hit" when the big hit type is "non-probable change" may be called "non-probable change big hit". In addition, the jackpot gaming state based on the "probably strange jackpot" may be referred to as "probably variation jackpot game state". Moreover, the big hit game state based on the "non-probable variation big hit" may be called "non-probability variation big hit game state".

  After the probability variation big hit game state is finished, the probability that the variable display result is "big hit" (the jackpot probability) is controlled to be the probability variation state which is higher than the normal state. The probability variation state continues until the next big hit game state is started.

  After the probability variation big hit game state or the non-probability variation big hit game state is finished, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to a time saving state which is shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, one of the ending conditions is satisfied first, when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) and the next big hit game state is started. Continue until you do.

  In the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning port than in the non-time saving state such as the normal state which is not in the time saving state. You may change to and. For example, control to make the fluctuation time of the normal symbols in the general-purpose game (the period for variable display of the general-purpose figure, also called general-purpose figure fluctuation time) shorter than in the normal state, or variable display in each general-purpose game The normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B may be changed to the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by a control or the like that improves the probability that the result will be “universal figure hit” compared to the normal state. Such control is called high opening control (also referred to as "time saving control" or "high base control"). By controlling to such a time saving state, the time required until the variable display result becomes "big hit" next is shortened, and the game state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., which is advantageous for the player. The probability of being a “hit” and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game is a “big hit” will cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, the power is supplied. The state is controlled in the same manner as when a predetermined return process is not executed after the input.

  The time saving state is also referred to as "high base", and the gaming state that is not the time saving state is also referred to as "low base" "non-time saving state". The probability variation state is also referred to as “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability” or “non-probability change”.

  In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern (this is also a kind of effect) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (the variable display result) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol ( A combination of three decorative patterns) is also stopped (displayed).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a decorative pattern that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later (“reach variation”). (Also referred to as “pattern”) is a display mode in which the fluctuation continues.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display. As the reach effect, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B having different effect modes are prepared. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of super reach B>super reach A>normal reach.

  The jackpot expectation is, for example, a ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed in synchronization with the special figure game is “big hit” described later. It is also a percentage.

  Also, “pseudo-relation” may be executed before the reach is established. "Pseudo-ream" is an effect in which all the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative designs are temporarily stopped and then changed again, a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). .. The number of times of re-variation in the following description is the number of times of re-variation of the decorative pattern excluding the initial variation until the decorative pattern first temporarily stops. In the pseudo run, the larger the number of re-variations, the higher the jackpot expectation. The temporarily stopped decorative design may be a design that has been variably displayed until then, or a design different from the design that has been variably displayed until then (for example, a design dedicated to pseudo-relation).

  Further, in this embodiment, the race effect (FIG. 24, FIG. 25) is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the race production, the characters of two runners (different in color here) with different jackpot expectations perform a race (race), and when either one wins, the jackpot expectations of the variable display being executed Is a production (the expectation degree of the big hit of the winning runner is notified as the expectation degree of the big hit this time). Note that the race effect is an effect that allows one of the runners to win, and is also a type of selection effect that selects one of the runners. In the race production, both runners who appear may cancel the race (a mode in which neither runner is selected).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a notice effect called a one-time notification is also executed. If the one-shot notification is executed, the jackpot expectation is extremely high (here, “jackpot” is confirmed). The one-shot notice may be, for example, an effect such as displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 for a short time, operating an accessory not shown, or outputting a predetermined sound.

  When the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", the fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7" at the time of probability variation big hit, non-probability variation big hit) on a predetermined effective line in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" At that time, "6" and the like) are all displayed together and displayed as a stop.

  If the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. There is. In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss combination" (Also referred to as “”) may be stopped and displayed.

(Main operation of pachinko gaming machine 1)
Hereinafter, the main operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like, but in each operation (each process), a process not described below may be performed.

(Main operation of main board 11)
On the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt process is performed every time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter/timer circuit) (not shown) that is supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds) (at an interrupt request signal supply interval). It is executed every predetermined time (2 ms). In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes a switch process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process, a normal symbol process process, a command control process, etc., and the game control timer interrupt process repeatedly executes for each timer interrupt. As a result, game control and the like are realized.

  In the switch processing, each switch is determined by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. It is determined for each switch whether or not it is turned on (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed). The result of this determination is temporarily stored in the RAM 102 or the like, and is used in special symbol process processing or normal symbol process processing.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  The special symbol process process, based on the determination result in the switch process, the process of suspending or executing the special symbol game, the big hit game state, etc. (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, The control includes the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the special winning opening door solenoid 82). In the special symbol process processing, transmission setting of the effect control command is performed according to the progress of the game.

  Ordinary symbol process processing, based on the determination result in the switch process, the suspension and execution of the universal figure game, the real variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) open state, etc. It is the processing (including the control of the ordinary symbol display 20, the ordinary figure hold display 25C, the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory).

  The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted in the special symbol process process or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Production control command set for transmission in special symbol process processing)
Next, the production control command which is set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing and is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 in the command control processing will be described. FIG. 3 shows an example of main effect control commands. In addition, the following "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command is composed of MODE data and EXT data.

  The command 8000 (H) is a first fluctuation start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of variable display (variation) of the first special figure. The command 8001(H) is a second variation start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of variable display (variation) of the second special figure. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command.

  The command 81XX(H) specifies a variation pattern of variable display of a special figure game or a decorative pattern (execution time of variable display of a special figure or a decorative pattern (special figure variation time), or a variable display pattern of a decorative pattern). ) Is a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates (notifies). A numerical value corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 11; details will be described later) is set in “XX” (same for EXT data and “XX”) of the command (for example, in the case of fluctuation pattern PA1-1). For example, "00". The command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

  The command 8CXX(H) is a display result designation command for designating (notifying) whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type (that is, a variable display result). A numerical value corresponding to the display result is set in “XX” of the command (for example, “00” for “miss”, “01” for “probable variation big hit”, etc.). The command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

  The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol fixing designation command for designating (notifying) the end of the special figure game (that is, deriving and displaying the variable display result). The symbol confirmation designating command designates to end the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol and to derive and display the display result. The command is transmitted at the end of the special figure game.

  The command A000(H) is a hit start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the big hit game state (also the start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect executed at the start of the big hit game state, such as an effect for notifying that the big hit game state has been reached. This command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

  The command A300 (H) is a hit end designation command for designating (notifying) the end of the jackpot gaming state (which is also the start of the ending). The ending is an effect executed at the end of the big hit game state, such as an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game state. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

  The command B100(H) is a first start prize designating command for designating (notifying) that the first start prize has been generated due to the entry of the game medium into the first start prize hole. The command B200 (H) is a second start winning award designating command for designating (notifying) that the second starting award has been generated due to the entry of the game medium into the second starting award winning opening. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command. The start winning award designating command is transmitted when a start winning is generated (at the time of starting winning).

  The command C000 (H) is a first special figure reserved storage number addition specification command for designating (notifying) that the first start prize is generated and the first special figure reserved storage number is increased by one. The command C100 (H) is a second special figure reserved storage number addition specification command for designating (notifying) that the second starting prize is generated and the second special figure reserved storage number is increased by one. These commands may be collectively referred to as a special figure reserved storage number addition designation command. The special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is transmitted when the start winning occurs (at the time of starting winning).

  The command C200 (H) is a first special figure pending storage number subtraction designating command for designating (notifying) that the first special figure pending storage number is decreased by one when the first special figure game is executed. The command C300 (H) is a second special figure reserved storage number subtraction designation command that specifies (notifies) that the second special figure reserved storage number will decrease by one when the second special figure game is executed. These commands may be collectively referred to as a special figure reserved storage number subtraction designation command. The special figure reserved storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process (step S101).

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on (refer to the determination result of the switch process described above. Hereinafter, on determination of various switches) Is the same) (step S201). If the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S202). .. The CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in the RAM 102, for example, to determine the first special figure reserved storage number. Is specified (hereinafter, the same applies to the number of first special figure reserved storages). When the number of first special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start mouth buffer value which is the stored value of the start mouth buffer provided in the RAM 102 is set as the occurrence of the first start prize. , "1" (step S203).

  When the first starting opening switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), 2 It is determined whether the starting port switch 22B is on (step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on (step S204; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") ( Step S205). The CPU 103 uses the second reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved storage number) provided in the RAM 102, for example, to determine the second special figure reserved storage number. Is specified (hereinafter, the same applies to the number of second special figure reservation storages). When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start mouth buffer value is set to "2" as the occurrence of the second start winning (step S206).

  After performing either of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the first special drawing game is satisfied (when the first starting winning prize occurs), the first special drawing is suspended. When the number of memory is increased by 1, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the second special drawing game is established (when the second starting winning occurs) The number of 2nd special figure reservation storage increases by one. At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the RAM 102, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S208).

  After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the special figure display result (from the numeric value data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter (the value is updated by the game random number update process) provided in the RAM 102. Variable display result of special figure game) Random value MR1 for determining (any value of "1" to "65535") and random number value MR2 for determining jackpot type (any value of "1" to "100") Numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 (any value of "1" to "100") for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of an empty entry in the special figure pending storage unit (provided in the RAM 102) corresponding to the starting opening buffer value ( Step S210).

  In the process of step S210, for example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the pending data is reserved. The data is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit. In this way, the pending data representing the pending special drawing game is stored in the special drawing pending storage unit.

  As shown in FIG. 6(A), the first special figure reservation storage unit associates, for example, with the reservation numbers “1” to “4” in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning port. The numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR3 is stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit in this manner indicates the first special figure game whose execution is pending.

  As shown in FIG. 6(B), the second special figure suspension storage unit associates the suspension numbers “1” to “4” with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, for example. The numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR3 is stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit in this manner indicates the second special figure game whose execution is pending.

  In this embodiment, in this way, a special figure game that has not been started yet (execution is pending) (particularly, information regarding the special figure game) is stored as a pending storage.

  Returning to FIG. 5, following the process of step S210, a start winning command is executed (step S211). If the starting opening buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the first starting winning award designating command and the first special figure reserved storage number addition specifying command as the starting winning award command, and the starting opening buffer value is " If it is "2", the transmission setting of the second start winning award designation command and the second special figure reserved storage number addition designation command is performed as the start winning award command (step S401).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S212). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S212; "2"), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value (starting port buffer value) is initialized to "0" ( (Step S213), the start winning determination process is ended. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S212; "1"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing.

  In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S231). When the number of second special figure reservation storages is other than "0" (step S231; No), the random numbers stored in the first area (the storage area corresponding to the reservation number "1") of the second special figure reservation storage unit. The numerical data of the numerical values MR1 to MR3 are read (step S232). As a result, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the second start winning is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer of the RAM 102.

  Subsequent to the process of step S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1 by subtracting the second reserved storage number count value, for example, and the storage content in the second special figure reserved storage unit is shifted (step S233). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the suspension number “1” (storage area corresponding to the suspension numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure suspension storage unit is moved upward by one entry. shift. Further, in step S233, the total pending storage number is decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S235). When the number of the first special figure reservation storages is other than "0" (step S235; No), the random numbers stored in the first area (the storage area corresponding to the reservation number "1") of the first special figure reservation storage unit. The numerical data of the numerical values MR1 to MR3 are read (step S236). As a result, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the first start prize is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer of the RAM 102.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, the first special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1 by subtracting the first reserved storage number count value, for example, and the storage content in the first special figure reserved storage section is shifted (step S237). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reservation number “1” (storage area corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure reservation storage unit is made higher by one entry. shift. In addition, in the process of step S237, the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1. Then, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238). By the above processing, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game.

  After performing either of the processing of steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol (variable display result of the special symbol game) is determined to be either “big hit” or “miss”. Yes (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, the first special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 8A; referred to in the non-probable variation state) or the second special figure display result determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 101. (See FIG. 8B. Referred to when the state is the probable variation state). Whether or not the probability variation state is specified is determined by, for example, the state of a probability variation flag (a flag that is turned on in the probability variation state) provided in the RAM 102. In each special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “miss”. Just do it. The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read out to the random number buffer for variation (decision that matches the random number value. The decision result assigned to the value is the decision result of this time. It should be noted that the CPU 103 determines the special figure display result to be “big hit” at a higher determination rate in the probability variation state than in the non-probability variation state (see the determination rate in FIG. 8 ).

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “big hit” (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step S241).

  Then, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 9) prepared in advance in the ROM 101 is used. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to any of the jackpot types of “non-probability variation” and “probability variation” that are the determination result. .. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the jackpot type determining random number value MR2 read out to the variation random number buffer.

  After that, the CPU 103 stores the big hit type by storing the data indicating the determination result of the big hit type in the big hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S243).

  When the special figure display result is not "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No), after the process of step S243, the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game to be executed this time is displayed. The determined special symbol is determined (step S246). As an example, when the big hit flag is off, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is on, depending on the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer, one of a plurality of special symbols predetermined as a big hit symbol is determined as a confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S246, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" (step S247), the special symbol normal process is ended.

  When the number of reserved memories of the first special figure game is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing the demo setting (step S248), the special symbol normal processing is ended. In the demo setting, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the start of display of the demo screen has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (for example, the RAM 102 is designated as a customer waiting demo). A flag that turns on when the command has been transmitted is provided, and the determination is performed based on the state of this flag). At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demo setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted and set, and then the demo setting is completed.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S261; No), the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (step S265). The variation pattern specifies the execution time (special figure variation time) of variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern, and the variable display pattern of the decorative pattern.

  FIG. 11 shows a variation pattern used in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are PA1-1, PA2-1, PA3-2 and PA3-8 as variation patterns at the time of losing. Further, there are PB4-2 to PB4-8 as variation patterns at the time of a big hit. PA1-1 and PA2-1 specify non-reach. PA2-1 is a pattern for time saving (with shortening) in which the special figure variation time (execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than normal (PA1-1).

  PA3-2 to PA3-4 and PB3-2 to PB3-4 are patterns that specify execution of normal reach. PA3-2 and PB3-2 specify non-execution of the pseudo-link, PA3-3 and PB3-3 specify execution of the pseudo-link that performs the re-variation once, and PA3-4 and PB3-4, It is a pattern that specifies the execution of a pseudo run in which re-variation is performed twice.

  PA3-5 to PA3-6 and PB3-5 to PB3-6 are patterns that specify execution of super reach A. PA3-5 and PB3-5 are patterns that specify the execution of pseudo-runs that perform re-change twice, and PA3-6 and PB3-6 are patterns that specify the execution of pseudo-runs that perform re-change three times.

  PA3-7 to PA3-8 and PB3-7 to PB3-8 are patterns that specify execution of super reach B. PA3-7 and PB3-7 are patterns that specify the execution of the pseudo run that performs the re-change twice, and PA3-8 and PB3-8 are patterns that specify the execution of the pseudo run that performs the re-change three times.

  In the process of step S262, for example, the variation pattern for a big hit is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table prepared in the ROM 101. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern for each jackpot at the time of jackpot as a determination result (for example, to realize the determination rate of FIG. PB3-2 to PB3-8). The CPU 103 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 read out to the random number buffer for fluctuations, thereby changing patterns at the time of big hits (one of PB3-2 to PB3-8). To decide.

  Further, in the process of step S265, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined by using, for example, the first variation pattern determination table for loss or the second variation pattern determination table for loss. The first loss variation pattern determination table is used when the time saving state is not set, and the second loss variation pattern determination table is used when the time saving state is set. Whether or not it is in the time saving state is specified by, for example, the state of a time saving flag (a flag that is turned on in the time saving state) provided in the RAM 102. In the first lost variation pattern determination table, the numerical value (determined value) that is compared with the random number value MR3 is the variation pattern at the time of loss (PA1-1) as the determination result so as to realize the determined ratio of FIG. , PA3-2 to PA3-8). In the second loss variation pattern determination table, the numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR3 is the variation pattern at the time of loss (PA2-1) as the determination result so as to realize the determination ratio of FIG. 13(B). , PA3-2 to PA3-8). The CPU 103 refers to the first or second lost variation pattern determination table on the basis of the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which is read into the random number buffer for variation, and thereby the variation pattern at the time of loss (PA1- 1, PA3-2 to PA3-4, or PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4).

  Referring to the determination rates of FIGS. 12 and 13, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of super reach B>super reach A>normal reach. Moreover, the larger the number of re-variations in the pseudo-relation, the higher the jackpot expectation tends to be. In particular, when the same reach effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the number of re-variations is larger. In the time saving state, the PA2-1 (see FIG. 13) having a short special figure fluctuation time is selected at the time of losing, so in the time saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time becomes shorter than in the non-time saving state. ..

  After performing either of the processes of steps S262 and S265, the special figure variation time (see FIG. 11) corresponding to the variation pattern determined this time is set (step S266). For example, a timer initial value corresponding to the special figure variation time is set in a predetermined timer of the RAM 102 (after that, the timer value is updated for each timer interrupt or the like to measure the elapsed time from the start of the special figure game execution). Will be done.)

  Following the processing of step S266, the variation of the special symbol is started so that one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game in which the start condition is satisfied is started (step S267). ). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a drive signal for executing the first special figure game is transmitted to the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a drive signal for executing the second special figure game is transmitted to the second special symbol display device 4B.

  After the process of step S267 is executed, transmission setting of a variation start command (various commands for designating the above determination result) is set as a command for starting execution of the special figure game (step S271). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the first variation start designation command, the variation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the first special figure pending storage number subtraction designation command. I do. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the second variation start designation command, the variation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the second special figure pending storage number subtraction designation command. I do.

  After the process of step S268 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S269), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the elapsed time from the start of the special figure game (which may be measured by the predetermined timer or the like) has reached the special figure change time set above (the predetermined timer value is 0). If it has not reached, supply a drive signal for executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. After this, the special symbol is changed and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special figure variation time is reached, the timing for deriving the variable display result has been reached, so a predetermined drive signal is supplied to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the above is determined. The variable display result of this time ("Missing" is "-", "Probability change" is "7", "Non-probability change" is "3") is stopped (derived display), and the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation designation command is set. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. The special figure game is executed by repeatedly executing step S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". For example, when the variable display result of this time is "big hit" (when the big hit flag is on, etc.), the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the probability variation flag to off. After that, the transmission of the hit start designation command is set, the special figure process flag is updated to "4", and the present process is terminated. When the player is in a time-saving state due to “miss” (when the big hit flag is off, etc.), it is determined whether a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state have been executed (for example, a time-saving counter (time saving counter provided in the RAM 102). The counter for counting the remaining number of times) is decremented by 1 and it is determined whether the value after decrement is "0"), and when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed (the count value is "0"). In this case), the time saving flag is reset to OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is set to “0”, and the present processing is terminated. Even when the variable display is not performed due to “miss” and the variable display is not executed a predetermined number of times, the value of the special figure process flag is set to “0” and the present process is terminated.

  The big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". For example, the elapsed time after setting the transmission of the hit start designation command (measured by a timer or the like provided in the RAM 102. The same applies to other elapsed times) is set in advance in the fanfare waiting time ( It is determined whether or not the waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit game state is reached, and if not reached, the big hit opening preprocessing is ended. When the fanfare wait time is reached, processing for opening the special winning opening (supply of solenoid drive signal) is performed to start the round game, and the special figure process flag is updated to "5". By repeating step S114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting for the start timing of the round game (waiting for the end of fanfare) and opening of the special winning opening are realized.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". For example, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to end the round game. The number of times the count switch 23 is turned on (the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) becomes a predetermined value (for example, "9") (it may be counted by a counter or the like provided in the RAM 102), or a round game is performed. When the time elapsed from the start (after opening the special winning opening) reaches the upper limit period of the round game (for example, 29 seconds), and when it is time to end the round game, the big winning opening is set. A process of ending the round game by returning to the closed state (a process of turning off the solenoid 82) and the like are performed. When the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (it may be counted by a counter or the like provided in the RAM 102), the hit end designation command is set to be transmitted, and the special figure process is performed. A process of updating the flag to "7" (step S603) is performed, and this process is ended. When it is not the final round game, the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and this processing is ended. If it is not the time to end the round game, the present process is ended as it is (a process for maintaining the special winning opening in an open state may be performed). By repeating step S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the special winning opening is kept open until the timing of returning the special winning opening to the closed state, and finally the special winning opening is closed.

  The big hit opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the round game (after closing the special winning opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (interval period of the round game), and when not reached. , The closed state is maintained, and this processing ends. When the predetermined closing time is reached, processing for opening the special winning opening is executed for starting the round game, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and this processing is ended.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 each time a timer interrupt occurs after the special winning opening is opened in step S114.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In the jackpot end process, it is determined whether the elapsed time from the end of the last round game has reached the ending waiting time set above, that is, whether the ending waiting time has ended. When the ending waiting time has not ended, the ending has not ended, so the jackpot end process ends. When the ending waiting time ends, the ending ends, so it is next determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is a probable change (“probable change”). The big hit type is stored in the big hit type buffer. When the jackpot type is "probability variation", the probability variation flag is set to the ON state. Regardless of the type of jackpot, a predetermined time saving count is set in the time saving count counter as an initial value (initial value of remaining time saving time, for example, 100), and the time saving flag is turned on. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" (step S616), and this processing ends.

  In the above series of processing, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, one variable display or the like is finished, so the game control process timer, the jackpot type buffer setting value, Various data such as the states of various flags (things that should not be carried over to the next variable display) may be appropriately reset.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
The effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 executes a predetermined effect control main process after the activation. Further, when the effect control command is received from a predetermined input port of the I/O 125, separately from the effect control main processing, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect control command as a received command, for example, an effect control command provided in the RAM 122. Store in receive buffer. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined initialization process. After that, the production control CPU 120 generates a timer interrupt according to an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter/timer circuit) (not shown) that is supplied every predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds) (at an interrupt request signal supply interval). The command analysis process, the demo display process, the effect control process process, the effect random number process, and the like are executed at every predetermined time (2 ms).

  The command analysis process is a process of reading and analyzing the received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, and making settings corresponding to the analysis result. In the demo display process, when the command analyzed in the command analysis process is the customer waiting demo specification command, the start setting of the production that starts the display of the demo screen (the contents of the start setting will be described later) is made, and every timer interrupt The production operation control (contents of the production operation control will be described later) for displaying the demo screen that has been set to start is performed. The effect control process process is a process of executing an effect according to an effect control command. The production random number updating process is a process of updating the production random number value used for production control by software.

(Regarding performance execution)
In the effect control main processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs start setting for starting execution of various effects (effect start setting), effect operation control for executing the effect set for start, and the like. Each flag, each timer, each counter, and the like are provided in the RAM 122 (the same applies to other processing).

  For the start setting of the effect, for example, an effect control pattern for executing an effect (variable display of decorative pattern, race effect, one-shot notification, demo screen display, etc.) is set in the RAM 122 as a use pattern, and the effect is set. It includes setting an initial value in the process timer according to the control pattern. After the initial value is set, the timer value of the process timer is decremented at a predetermined timing (when command analysis processing is executed, performance operation control is executed, etc.) each time a timer interrupt occurs (thus, the performance control pattern is executed). You can specify the elapsed time of the production). The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects (including variable display of decorative patterns), and is associated with a process timer determination value that is compared with the timer value of the process timer and the determination value. It is composed of process control data including generated effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lighting control data, etc.) and end code. The data that forms the effect control pattern is stored in the ROM 121.

  The effect operation control is control for executing an effect based on the effect control pattern set in the effect start setting. For example, of the effect control execution data corresponding to the process timer determination value that matches the current timer value of the process timer, the display control command according to the display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123, and is transmitted to the image display device 5. An image is displayed, a sound effect signal according to the sound control data is transmitted to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R, and an illumination signal according to the lighting control data is sent to the lamp control board 14. Control is performed by transmitting and turning on/off the game effect lamp 9 to execute various effects. The performance operation control is repeatedly performed each time a timer interrupt occurs, so that various performances specified by the performance control pattern are executed.

(Command analysis process)
In the command analysis process, the received command (the effect control command received by the effect control board 12) stored in the effect control command receiving buffer is analyzed (for example, the MODE data is confirmed), and the effect command concerned determines which effect control. Whether or not it is a command is specified, and processing according to the specified effect control command is performed. When there are a plurality of received commands, command analysis processing is performed for each command.

  FIG. 14 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis by the command analysis processing and the processing contents performed in the command analysis processing corresponding to the effect control command. Each flag and each storage area in the drawing are provided in the RAM 122. Further, “set” for a flag means to turn the flag on. The state of each flag and the command stored in each storage area are reset or erased at an appropriate timing.

  Further, when the first special figure reserved storage number addition designation command is received, a process of newly displaying the first reserved display image in the display area 5H (for example, a process of controlling the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123. The same applies to the display control for the hold display image). When the second special figure reservation storage number addition designation command is received, processing for newly displaying the second reservation display image in the display area 5H is performed. By doing so, the first reserved display image is increased by one in response to the first special figure game being newly suspended on the basis of the occurrence of the first start prize. In addition, the second hold display image is increased by 1 in response to the second hold of the second special figure game newly based on the occurrence of the second start prize.

  When the first special figure reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received, the rightmost image among the first reserved display images displayed in the display area 5H is erased, and the remaining first reserved display images are moved to the right. Perform processing to shift to. When the second special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, the leftmost image of the second reserved display images displayed in the display area 5H is erased, and the remaining second reserved display images are shifted to the left. Perform processing to By doing so, the first pending display image is decreased by one in response to the new execution of the first special figure game. In response to the second special figure game being newly executed, the second hold display image is decreased by one.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control process processing. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the effect process flag is "0". In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 causes the variation start command (first or second variation start designation command, variation pattern designation command, display result designation command, first or second special figure pending storage number subtraction designation). Command) is received. If no fluctuation start command has been received, this processing ends. When the variation start command is received, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the start of the special drawing game, so the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process is ended. To do.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 in the effect control process process is a process for starting the variable display of the decorative pattern which is executed in synchronization with the special figure game to be executed, and the effect process flag is "1". Is executed when. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process.

  In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop design or the like that is a fixed decorative design as a variable display result of the decorative design (step S501). For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the display result designation command (stored in the display result designation command storage area) and the fluctuation pattern designation command (stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. The final stop symbol is determined based on the present variable display result and the present variation pattern indicated by. The final stop design may be predetermined in accordance with the variable display result designated by the display result designation command and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. The fixed decorative design may be randomly determined from predetermined fixed decorative design candidates (candidates according to the variable display result).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute one notification (step S502). As an example, the effect control CPU 120 has a one-shot notification execution determination table A (referred to when the current variable display result is “big hit”) and one-shot notification execution determination table B (this time) prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The variable display result is referred to when the result is “out”, and whether or not to execute one notification is determined. In the one-notice execution determination tables A and B, the effect random numbers among the effect random numbers updated by the random number circuit (the value is updated by the effect random number update process) provided in the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122. It suffices that the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with SR1 is assigned to “execution performed” or “no execution”, which is the determination result (the determination value of the above table A is the determination rate at the time of the big hit in FIG. 17). The determination values in Table B above are assigned so as to achieve the determination ratio at the time of loss in FIG. 17). The CPU 103 extracts the random number SR1 for effect, and based on the extracted random number SR1 for effect, refers to the one-notice execution determination table A or B in accordance with the variable display result of this time, thereby executing the one-notice notification. The presence or absence is determined (the determination result assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value is the determination result of this time. The same applies hereinafter). As shown in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, when the variable display result this time is “miss”, one notification is always “no execution”. Therefore, when the one-shot notification is executed, the "big hit" is confirmed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current variation pattern is one that specifies execution of pseudo-relation (either PA3-3 to PA3-8 or PB3-3 to PB3-8) (step S503), in the case of designating execution of pseudo-relationship (step S503; Yes), it is determined whether or not the race effect is executed (step S504). As an example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the race effect by referring to the race effect execution determination table prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. In the race effect execution determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the effect random number SR2 among the effect random numbers may be assigned to “execution” or “no execution” as the determination result ( For the determination rate, see the determination example in FIG. The CPU 103 determines whether or not to execute the race effect by extracting the effect random number SR2 and referring to the race effect execution determination table based on the extracted effect random number SR2. The race effect is executed at the time of pseudo-execution (step S503), and is executed with a probability of 1/2 regardless of the variable display result this time (see FIG. 18).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the race effect is determined to be executed in step S504 (step S505), and if it is determined to be executed (step S505; Yes), the effect pattern of the race effect (effect mode). ) Is determined according to the variation pattern and the presence/absence of one notification (step S506).

  Here, the race effect will be described. The race effect is an effect in which two runners race as described above (FIGS. 24 and 25). In this embodiment, each runner is distinguished by its color. Each runner has a jackpot expectation. There are blue, green, red, and rainbow as the colors of each runner, and the big hit expectation is high in the order of rainbow>red>green>blue (Fig. 19). The jackpot expectation of the character who won in the race effect (the final race effect when a plurality of race effects are performed) is notified as the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed and the jackpot expectation of the special drawing game. The green and blue runners, which have relatively low jackpot expectations, belong to the first group, and the rainbow and red runners, who have relatively high jackpot expectations, belong to the second group. As described above, the race effect is executed at the time of the pseudo-repeated execution, and is executed once or twice according to the number of re-variations in the pseudo-repeated execution (FIG. 23 ). When the re-variation is once, the race effect is executed after the first re-variation starts and before the execution timing of the one-shot notification (executed at a predetermined timing before the reach is established). (FIG. 23(A)). When the re-variation is 2-3 times, the race effect is executed at each of the first timing and the subsequent second timing (FIGS. 23B and 23C). When the re-variation is twice, the first timing comes at the first re-variation and the second timing comes at the second re-variation. When the re-variation is three times, the first timing comes at the second re-variation and the second timing comes at the third re-variation. The second timing arrives after the execution timing of the one-shot announcement and before the reach is established, regardless of whether the re-change is twice or three times.

  20 to 21 show the effect pattern of the race effect and the determination ratio thereof. FIG. 20 is an example of determining the effect pattern when the pseudo-regular re-change is once (the selected effect is executed once). FIG. 21 is an example of determining the effect pattern when the re-change of the pseudo-repeating is repeated two or three times (the selected effect is executed twice at the first timing and the second timing). The effect pattern specifies the color of the runners who race and which runner wins (including the case where both runners stop the race) for each race effect (two times in FIG. 21). Has specified the production pattern of the race production).

  20 and 21, the color on the left side of the arrow is the color of two runners who race, and the color on the right side of the arrow is the color of the runner who wins the race. The "x" on the right side of the arrow indicates that both runners will cancel the race. For example, “red×rainbow→red” indicates an effect pattern in which a red runner and a rainbow runner race and a red runner wins (the red jackpot expectation is notified). “Red×rainbow→×” indicates a production pattern in which a red runner and a rainbow runner race, but both runners stop the race.

  In step S506, the effect control CPU 120 refers to one of the race effect pattern determination tables A to E prepared in advance in the ROM 121 to determine the effect pattern of the race effect. The race effect pattern determination table A is referred to when the variable display result of this time is “big hit” and the change pattern of this time is to execute a pseudo change of one re-change. The race effect pattern determination table B is referred to when the variable display result of this time is “miss” and the change pattern of this time is to execute a pseudo re-change one time. The race effect pattern determination table C is a case where the variable display result of this time is “big hit”, the change pattern of this time executes re-variation 2-3 times of pseudo-repeating, and is referred to when there is no execution of one notification. It The race effect pattern determination table D is referred to when the variable display result of this time is “miss” and the change pattern of this time executes pseudo-repeating 2-3 times again, and there is no execution of one notification. It The race effect pattern determination table E is referred to when the variable display result of this time is “big hit”, the variation pattern of this time executes the re-variation 2-3 times of pseudo-repeating, and there is the execution of the one-shot notification. It

  In the race effect pattern determination tables A to E, for example, if a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the effect random number SR3 of the effect random numbers is assigned to each pattern of the race effect that is the determination result. Good. The determination values of the above table A are allocated so as to realize the determination ratio at the time of big hit in FIG. 20, and the determination values of the above table B are allocated so as to realize the determination ratio at the time of loss of FIG. The determination value of C is assigned so as to realize the determination rate at the time of big hit in FIG. 21(A), and the determination value of the above table D is assigned so as to achieve the determination rate at the time of loss in FIG. 21(A). The determination values of the table E are assigned so as to realize the determination rate at the time of the big hit in FIG.

  In step S506, the CPU 103 extracts the effect random number SR3, and based on the extracted effect random number SR3, refers to one of the race effect pattern determination tables A to E in accordance with the present variable display result and the like. , Decide the production pattern of the race production.

  As shown in FIG. 20, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the relationship between the determination ratios of the effect patterns determined is that the rainbow runner wins pattern (SE06)> the red runner wins pattern (SE05)> The pattern in which the green runner wins (SE03)> The pattern in which the blue runner wins (SE02)> The pattern in which both runners stop the race (SE01, SE04 (determination ratio of total)) The size relationship is the opposite. In addition, in FIG. 21, the size of the color of the runner who wins at the second timing and the determination ratio when both runners cancel the race (the total value when there are multiple patterns with the same color win or the race is canceled) The relationship is the same as in FIG. Due to such a relationship, the jackpot expectation degree increases in the order of rainbow>red>green>blue. Also, the expectation of jackpots when both runners cancel the race is lower than blue and lower than when one runner wins (lower than which color runner wins). In other words, when both runners stop the race, it is announced that the big hit expectation is lower than when the runners win. In addition, in SE01 and SE04, SE04 has a higher jackpot expectation.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when at least one of the blue runner and the green runner belonging to the first group, which has a relatively low expectation of jackpot, races, the ratio of both runners canceling the race (hereinafter, When the red runners and the rainbow runners belonging to the second group, which have a relatively high jackpot expectation, are racing (that is, the blue and green runners belonging to the first group do not appear) In the case of a pattern), both runners stop the race (hereinafter referred to as the second stop ratio). Here, in this embodiment, the rate at which the variable display result is a big hit is about 1/34 even when the probability is changed (FIG. 8 ), and the re-variation three times of re-variation with the highest big hit expectation results in a big hit. The ratio is (1/34)×{(24+30)/100} (see FIG. 12)=(54/3400). On the other hand, the ratio of the three consecutive re-variations with the highest jackpot expectation to be lost is (33/34)×{(5+2)/100} (see non-time saving time in FIG. 13A)=(231 /3400). For this reason, the determination rate of the effect pattern in this embodiment is dominated by the determination rate in the loss even in the case of pseudo re-variation of 3 times (lower jackpot expectation, re-variation 1 to 2 times). Then the decision rate in the loss becomes more dominant). In FIG. 20, the first discontinuation ratio (determination ratio of SE01/sum of determination ratios of SE01 to SE03) at the time of loss is 25/(25+20+10)=25/55 (the denominator of 100 is common. The same applies hereinafter). The second discontinuation rate (determination rate of SE04/sum of determination rates of SE04 to SE06) is 40/(40+4+1)=40/45, and the second discontinuation rate is higher. Further, the first stop ratio (total of determination rates of SE11 to SE12/(total of determination rates of SE11 to SE16)) when the race effect is lost at the first timing in FIG. 21A is (11+2)/(11+2+11+2+10+2). )=13/38, and the second discontinuation rate (total determination rate of SE17 to SE18/(total determination rate of SE17 to SE19) is (59+2)/(59+2+1)=61/62, and the second discontinuation is Similarly, the first stop ratio is 0/38 and the second stop ratio is 59/62 when the race effect is lost at the first timing in Fig. 21(A). As can be seen from the above relationship, in this embodiment, the second stop ratio is higher than the first stop ratio.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the red runner and the rainbow runner belonging to the second group race when the race effect is executed twice (when the runners belonging to the first group do not appear), Depending on the execution timing of the race effect, the rate at which any runner wins (the rate at which the race is cancelled) is different (here, the one with the later execution timing (the second timing) The percentage of winning is high). The ratio of winning of the red or rainbow runner at the first timing of the big hit in FIG. 21(A) (determination ratio of SE19/total determination ratio of SE17 to SE19) is 48/(1+12+48)=48/61. However, the ratio of the red or rainbow runners winning at the second timing of the big hit in FIG. 21(A) (total of the determination rate of SE18 to SE19/total of the determination rate of SE17 to SE19) is (12+48)/( 1+12+48)=60/61. Such a relationship is the same in the case of the loss in FIG. 21A and in the case of FIG. 21B. Therefore, the above can be said.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when one notification is executed, a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group race with each other at the second timing is performed, and a red or rainbow run is performed. The percentage of the runners of winning is higher than the percentage of the runners of red or rainbow winning in the race production in which the red runner and the rainbow runner belonging to the second group race when the one-shot notification is not executed. The one-time notification is executed when the variable display result is a "big hit", so when the one-time notification is executed, the race effect at the time of losing is not executed (FIG. 21(B )). At the second timing when the one-shot notification is not executed, the decision rate of SE17 that both red and rainbow runners stop the race at the second timing is higher than that when the red or rainbow runner wins (Fig. 21 ( A)), when the one-shot notification is executed, since there is no loss, the determination rate of SE17 is reduced (FIG. 21(B)). Moreover, the percentage of red or rainbow runners winning during a big hit does not change depending on whether or not there is one notification. Therefore, the above can be said. In addition, in FIG. 21(B), the determination rate of SE17 is set to "0/100", and at the second timing after the one-shot notification is executed, both the red and rainbow runners are prevented from stopping the race, You may make sure that either runner wins in the race production in which the red runner and the rainbow runner race.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, in each effect pattern for executing the two-time race effect, the expectation degree (color) of the runners appearing in the race effect is the first timing and the second timing. It is the same or the second timing is higher (runners of a color with a lower jackpot expectation than the runners that appeared at the first timing do not appear in the race production at the second timing). In addition, the big hit expectation (the big hit expectancy according to the color of the runner who wins in the race effect, or the big hit expectation when both runners stop the race) notified in the race effect is also the first timing and the second timing. Is the same, or the second timing is higher (but never lower).

  Note that the content and determination rate of the effect pattern in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 may be appropriately changed so as to satisfy at least one of the above conditions.

  After step S506, when there is no pseudo continuation (step S503; No), when there is no execution of race effect (step S505; No), the above determination result, the current variation pattern, the current variable display result, and the like, The start setting of the effect reflecting the above (set of the above-mentioned effect control pattern, setting the timer initial value to the process timer according to the special figure change time designated by the change pattern, etc.) is performed (step S507). Here, the first effect operation control may also be performed. After that, the production process flag is updated to "2" (step S508), and this processing ends.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 in the effect control process process of FIG. 15 is executed when the effect process flag is “2”. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display during presentation process.

  In the variable display effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step S521). As an example, the timer value of the process timer is updated (for example, decremented by 1) (may be updated at another timing that comes once per timer interrupt, such as at the beginning of effect control process processing), and after the update. It is determined that the variable display time has elapsed, for example, when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value of.

  When the variable display time has not elapsed (step S521; No), it is determined whether or not the present is the execution period for executing the one-shot notification (step S522). For example, the period may be predetermined in the set production control pattern (for example, the period is specified by comparing the timer value of the process timer with the production control pattern. Hereinafter, the same applies to other periods. ). During the execution period (step S522; Yes), effect operation control for executing one notification is performed (step S523).

  After step S523, if it is not the execution period of one notification (step S522; No), it is determined whether the present is the execution period of the race effect (step S524). The period may be predetermined in, for example, the set effect control pattern. When it is determined to be the execution period (step S524; Yes), effect operation control for executing the race effect is performed (step S525).

  After step S525, if the current time is not the execution period of the race effect (step S524; No), the variable display of the decorative design, the reach effect (when executed), and other effects in the variable display are executed. Performance operation control is performed (step S526), and the variable display effect processing is ended.

  When the variable display time has elapsed (step S521; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol fixing designation command has been received (step S530). At this time, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S530; No), the variable display effect process is ended.

  When the symbol confirmation designation command is received (step S530; Yes), display control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S531).

  After that, a predetermined fixed time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S539). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step S540), the variable display effect effect processing is ended.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 of FIG. 15 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The effect control CPU 120 does not reach the preset hit start designation command reception waiting time, since the current elapsed time (which may be measured by a predetermined timer) since the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, In addition, when the hit start designation command is received, the start setting of the big hit medium effect (effect from the start of fanfare to the end of the ending executed during the big hit game state) is set. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", and this processing ends. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not been reached and the hit start designation command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If the current elapsed time has reached the hit start designation command reception waiting time, it is determined that the variable display result of the special figure game is "miss", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", and this process is executed. finish.

  The hitting process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect operation control for executing an effect during a big hit. Then, when the hit end designation command is received, it means that all the round games have ended, so the start setting of the ending effect is set, and as the my character appears in the ending effect, You may set the start setting. The value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" and the hitting process is ended. If the hit end designation command has not been received, all the round games have not ended, so the present process ends.

  The ending process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5", and is a process for executing an ending when the jackpot gaming state ends. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether the present is the ending timing of the ending. The end timing may be determined by the effect control pattern. If it is not the end timing, the ending effect operation control is performed and this processing is ended. When the present is the end timing (for example, when the end code is read), this processing is ended.

(Execution timing of each performance)
When the pseudo-repeating is repeated once, the production is executed in the order of the re-changing start→race production→previous notice→reach establishment (FIG. 23(A)). When the re-variation is repeated twice, the first re-variation start→race production (first timing)→one-time notice→second re-variation start→race production (second timing)→reach is established The effects are sequentially executed (FIG. 23(B)). When the re-variation is performed three times, the second re-variation starts→race production (first timing)→one-time notice→third re-variation start→race production (second timing)→reach is established. The effects are sequentially executed (FIG. 23(C)).

(Example of production screen for race production)
In the case of a race production in which a red runner and a rainbow runner race (SE05, SE06, etc.), first, the red runner and the rainbow runner compete (Fig. 24(A)), and when red wins (SE05, etc.). ) Indicates that the red runner has the goal ahead of the rainbow runner (Fig. 24(B)), and the red runner has won (high jackpot expectation) (Fig. 24). (C)). If the rainbow wins (SE06 etc.), the rainbow runner will score ahead of the red runner (Figure 24(D)) and the rainbow runner will win (the highest jackpot expectation). ) Is notified (FIG. 24(E)). When both runners stop the race (SE04 etc.), first, as in the case of FIG. 24, the red runner and the rainbow runner compete (FIG. 25(A)), and then the cliff A appears. (FIG. 25(B)), both runners fell to the cliff A and stopped the race (FIG. 25(C)). It is announced that the expectation of a big hit is low due to the suspension of the race.

(effect)
In this embodiment, as described above, the ratio of both runners canceling the race in the race performance in which at least one of the blue runner and the green runner belonging to the first group, which has a relatively low jackpot expectation level, appears. Race production in which red runners and rainbow runners belonging to the second group, which have relatively high jackpot expectations, appear (that is, races in which blue or green runners belonging to the first group do not appear) The ratio of both runners stopping the race (second stop ratio) is higher in the production (see FIG. 20 and FIG. 21). This makes it possible to execute a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner appear, even when the jackpot expectation is low, and the effect can be enhanced. In particular, as in the above-described embodiment, the ratio of "miss" is usually higher than the ratio of "big hit" in the variable display result, so a race in which a red runner and a rainbow runner appear due to the above configuration It is possible to increase the appearance rate of the production, and the player expects that the big hit expectation is high each time the race production in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear is executed, so the production effect is enhanced. You can When a selection effect such as a race effect (as described above, a race effect is a type of selection effect) is executed, conventionally, when an option is not selected from the presented options (runner color). In, the production of high jackpot expectation (high expectation), which is not usually selected, was executed. However, as described above, the variable display result is not usually a "big hit", and therefore the player rarely comes into contact with the high-expectation production, and the production effect is not enhanced. In the above-described embodiment, a high degree of expectation is suggested (red runner and rainbow) based on the above-mentioned race effect (effect including an aspect in which both runners stop) and the relationship between the first stop ratio and the second stop ratio. The production effect is enhanced because it is easy to execute the race production in which the runners of (1) appear.

  As described above, in FIG. 20, in SE01 and SE04 in which both runners stop the race, SE04 has a higher jackpot expectation. In this way, even when both runners cancel the race, when the runners belonging to the first group have appeared, the jackpot expectation when the runners belonging to the second group has appeared (especially, It is better to set it higher than (when only the runners belonging to the first group have appeared). As a result, even when both runners cancel the race, when the runners belonging to the second group are appearing, you can have an expectation for a big hit, and also pay attention to the runners who appear in the race production. Therefore, the effect of production is enhanced.

  Further, as in the above embodiment, the determination rate of the pattern in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear and both of them stop the race (the production in which the runners of the colors belonging to the first group do not appear) is set to blue or By making it higher than the determination rate of the pattern in which at least one of the green runners appears and both of them cancel the race (production in which the runners of the colors belonging to the first group appear) (see FIGS. 20 and 21), It is possible to increase the execution ratio of the race production in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear, and to enhance the production effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, when the red runner and the rainbow runner belonging to the second group race when the race effect is executed twice (runners belonging to the first group (If they do not appear), the runner's winning rate (the rate at which the race is stopped) differs depending on the execution timing of the race effect (see FIGS. 20 and 21), so the player pays attention to each race effect. However, the effect of production is improved. In particular, in this embodiment, one of the runners having a later execution timing (the second timing) has a higher proportion of winning, so even if the degree of expectation notified in the first race production is poor, the race production The player expects to be executed again, and the effect of production is improved.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as described above, when one notification is executed, a race effect in which the red runner and the rainbow runner belonging to the second group race at the second timing is performed. In the case where the red or rainbow runner wins, the red or rainbow run ratio in which the red runner and the rainbow runner belonging to the second group race when the first notification is not executed is performed. Is higher than the percentage of runners who win (see FIGS. 20 and 21). This makes it difficult for both the red runner and the rainbow runner to cancel the race when the high-expectation one-shot notice is executed, making it less likely that both will cancel the race. It is possible to enhance the effect of production (it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in playing games).

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot expectation when both runners stop the race in the race production is lower than blue and lower than when one runner wins (runner of any color) Is lower than when it wins) (see FIGS. 20 and 21). In other words, when both runners stop the race, it is announced that the big hit expectation is lower than when the runners win. As a result, the player pays attention to which runner wins in the race effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in each effect pattern in which the race effect is executed twice, the expectation degree (color) of the runners appearing in the race effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing. Or, the second timing is higher (runners of a color with a lower jackpot expectation than the runners that appeared at the first timing do not appear in the race production at the second timing) (see FIG. 21). In addition, the big hit expectation (the big hit expectancy according to the color of the runner who wins in the race effect, or the big hit expectation when both runners stop the race) notified in the race effect is also the first timing and the second timing. Is the same, or the second timing is higher (but never lower). As a result, even if the jackpot expectation degree notified in the first race effect is low, it can be expected in the second race effect, or when the jackpot expectation degree informed in the first race effect is high. The jackpot expectation that is notified in the second race production can be further increased, and the production effect is improved.

(Modification)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and the like, and various modifications and applications of the above embodiments and the like are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and it is possible to solve at least one problem in the related art, and the part described in the above-mentioned embodiment It may be provided with the structure of. The modifications of the above-described embodiment are illustrated below, but at least some of the modifications can be combined as long as no contradiction occurs.

(Modification 1)
The effect control CPU 120 may perform the following effects. The effect control CPU 120, based on the variable display result specified by the display result specification command, the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command, the random number for effect, the table, etc., as described in the above embodiment, Whether or not to execute the effect, the execution mode, etc. are determined, the start of the effect is set, and the effect operation control is performed to execute the effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs an effect of displaying the meter M of FIG. 26 on the image display device 5, for example. The meter M is composed of four white squares. In the meter M, one quadrangle is painted black every time one point is accumulated. As a result, the display mode of the meter M changes stepwise. The larger the number of points accumulated in the meter M is, the higher the expectation degree of the big hit of the variable display being executed is informed (the effect control CPU 120 makes it easier to accumulate more points during the big hit, so that the number of points of the effect is increased. Determine the mode). That is, the meter M changes according to the jackpot expectation. It should be noted that when the meter M is full (when the quadrangle is all filled with black), a specific effect such as super reach may be executed (this also informs that the jackpot expectation is high. Therefore, the meter M will change according to the jackpot expectation.).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the point giving effect. The effect is, for example, an effect of hitting the arrow P2 on the target P1 as shown in FIG. 26 (FIG. 26(A)). When the arrow P2 hits the target P1 (in the case of success), 1 point is given to the meter M (the point accumulated in the meter M is increased by 1 point). When the target P1 is hit by the arrow P2, the fact that 1 point is given to the meter M is first notified by the display of “hit!+1Pt” (FIG. 26(B)), and the meter M is actually measured after a predetermined period has elapsed. Is given 1 point (a square is filled in black and 1 point is accumulated. Between FIGS. 26C to 26D). If the arrow P2 does not hit the target P1 (failure), the meter M does not change (points are not accumulated. FIG. 26G).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a pseudo-interconnection effect that stimulates whether or not pseudo-reconnection (re-fluctuation) is performed, for example, immediately before a temporary stop when performing re-variation. 26C and 26D). In the pseudo continuous production, for example, by displaying the card G, "Is the pseudo continuous?", flipping the card G at the end of the production, and displaying the contents written on the card G, the pseudo continuous production is performed. It is an effect that notifies whether or not (re-variation) is executed. With the card G and "pseudo-repeating?", whether or not a pseudo-repeating is generated is supported, and whether or not the pseudo-repeating is executed is notified as a result of the effect. In FIG. 26(D), since the flipped card G has a description of “pseudo-repeating”, it is informed that the pseudo-repeating will be executed, and after the notification, the decorative pattern is “3-4” (“re”). Is a temporary stop-only symbol.) (FIG. 26(E). The temporary stop may be a predetermined chance), and then the change is performed again (FIG. 26(F)). .. In the pseudo continuous effect, an effect for displaying the card G and "Is the pseudo continuous?" is introduced, and an effect in which the card G is turned over is called a result notification effect. Among the result notification effects, an effect in which nothing is written on the flipped card G (an effect that informs that the pseudo link is not executed) is called a failure effect, and the characters "pseudo link" are written on the flipped card G. A certain effect (an effect that informs that the pseudo-relation will be executed) is called a successful effect. In addition, the pseudo continuous production where the failure production is performed is referred to as a pseudo continuous production (failure), and the pseudo continuous production where the success production is performed is also referred to as a pseudo continuous production (success).

  The above-mentioned effect is executed, for example, in a unit of variable display of the decorative pattern once. Specifically, when one variable display is completed, the points accumulated in the meter M are reset.

  When the above-described effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 informs that one point is added to the meter M (the display mode of the meter M is changed) by the point addition effect (“hit!+1Pt”). Is displayed), the execution of the pseudo-interaction effect (failure) is restricted (FIGS. 26 and 27).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 27A, the timing at which 1 point is actually given after notification that 1 point will be given (a new square is newly painted black and 1 point is accumulated). In the period up to the timing (other effect execution restriction period), execution of the pseudo continuous effect (failure) is restricted. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 27B, a period from the notification that one point is given to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed (deriving the variable display result) (another effect execution restriction period) In, the execution of the pseudo continuous production (failure) is restricted. It should be noted that, during the other effect execution restriction period, the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (success) is not restricted. The cycle of the other effect execution restriction period is arbitrary, and may be any timing after the point at which 1 point is actually given to the meter M and before the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. If the point-giving effect is a failure effect (when the arrow P2 does not hit the target P1), execution of the pseudo-interconnection effect is prohibited regardless of whether the result notification effect is a success effect or a failure effect. Not performed (especially, the execution of simulated continuous production (failure) is not prohibited). Note that in the example of FIG. 26, the timing at which execution of the pseudo-entrainment effect starts is from when “hit!+1Pt” is displayed (FIG. 26B) until 1 point is actually given to the meter M. In between. The timing at which one point is actually given to the meter M may be a timing before or after the example of FIG. 26, and for example, an arbitrary timing (pseudo) in the period of FIGS. It may be done after execution of the continuous production is completed). The timing at which 1 point is actually given to the meter M may come immediately after notifying that 1 point will be given, and comes before the timing at which execution of the pseudo-interconnection effect is started. It may be good (the other production execution restriction period may include a period after the end of the pseudo continuous production).

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the variable display start setting process in step S171 whether or not to execute the point giving effect, whether or not to execute the pseudo-interconnection effect, but decides to execute the successful point giving effect. And, if it is decided to execute the pseudo-relational effect (failure) within the other effect execution restriction period, the execution of one of the point giving effect and the pseudo-relational effect is canceled (be sure to cancel. Or you may cancel at a fixed rate). Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 determines, in the variable display start setting process of step S171, an execution pattern of the point giving effect and the pseudo-interconnection effect from among predetermined patterns, and the predetermined pattern. There is no pattern that executes a successful point-giving effect and executes a pseudo-interaction effect (failure) within the other effect execution restriction period (or, the determination rate of the pattern is For example, it is set lower than the determination rate of the pattern or the like for executing the pseudo continuous production (success) within the production execution restriction period).

  In the case where the other effect execution restriction period is not provided, the pseudo-interaction effect (failure) may be executed indefinitely after being notified that one point will be given to the meter M. In such a case, The execution of the failure effect discourages the player, increases the frequency of the player having an impression that one point is different from the failure effect, and the interest of the game is reduced. In this modified example, the other effect execution restriction period is provided to limit the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (failure), so that the above inconvenience can be solved and the enjoyment of the game can be prevented from deteriorating. “Restriction” also includes prohibition. In the case of prohibition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Modification 2)
The race effect may be executable even at times other than the pseudo-relation. Further, the determination rate of whether or not to execute the race effect may be varied depending on the variable display result, whether or not the variation pattern is the reach effect, the type of the super reach, etc. (the race effect is executed. The jackpot expectation degree may be given to itself (for example, when the race effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree is higher than when it is not executed). Further, the number of times the race effect is executed may be increased, for example, according to the number of times of re-variation of the pseudo run. For example, if the re-variation is once, the race effect is executed once, if the re-variation is twice, the race effect is executed twice each time the re-variation is executed, and if the re-variation is three times, the re-variation is executed. Every three times, the race effect is executed a total of three times. Further, for example, the race effect may be executed before the re-change, and thereafter, the race effect may be executed once or plural times for each re-change. The race effect may be executed regardless of the progress of the pseudo run.

(Modification 3)
As a method of determining the pattern of the race effect, for example, the final aspect (the color of the runner who wins in the last race effect or whether both runners stop the race) so that the relationship of the jackpot expectation degree is satisfied, It is determined using a table, a random number for effect, etc., and in accordance with the mode, for example, to meet at least one of the above conditions mentioned in the description of FIG. 20 and FIG. , Etc.) may be decided. For example, in accordance with each of the final aspects described above, a pattern of a race effect (in the case of executing the race effect a plurality of times, a pattern of each effect (a result other than the last race effect is also included, a result such as which wins). )) is prepared in advance, and the pattern of the race effect is determined by lottery (such as by using the table and the random number for the effect as described above) according to the final object determined.

  The number of times of the race effect may be determined based on the lottery or the variation pattern, and the effect pattern of each race effect may be individually determined by the lottery. For example, the effect pattern of each race effect may be determined as in the determination example of FIG. 20 (similarly to the above, determined by lottery using the effect random number value and the table). It should be noted that the effect patterns that can be determined in each race effect and the determination rate of the effect patterns may be changed so as to satisfy the above-mentioned conditions mentioned in the description of FIGS. 20 and 21. Also, the color of the runners appearing in a certain race production (race production after the second race), and the expected jackpot degree (the expectation degree of the winning runner or the expectation degree when both runners stopped the race) However, for example, if it is lower than the color of the runner appearing in the previous race effect (especially one time before) or the expected jackpot expectation, the race effect (execution of only that race effect is stopped. , The previous race effect may be executed, or the execution of all the race effects including the previous race effect and the subsequent race effect may be stopped.) .. By doing so, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation of the race production other than the last one accurate, and the production effect is improved.

(Modification 4)
The variable display (may be simply variable display) of the identification information (special drawing, decorative design, general drawing, etc.) includes that the identification information blinks. For example, in a special drawing or a general drawing, a pattern in which all the segments are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately repeated. This is included in the variable display of identification information ( In this case, the one pattern (for example, a lost pattern) appears to blink. Further, the decorative design and the ordinary design may be variably displayed by blinking. Further, the identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display and the identification information that is the result of the variable display may be different. For example, as a variable display of a special drawing or a general drawing, a display of one horizontal bar (“−”) is made to blink, and as a variable display result, other displays (“7” for “big hit”, The variable display of the identification information includes deriving and displaying "1" in the case of "miss". For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be the confirmed decorative pattern. Note that in one variable display, the variable display of the identification information also includes a mode in which the identification information that was not displayed in the initial predetermined period is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (the special symbol is the temporary stop of the final stop symbol). It may be a decorative pattern that appears for the first time.). The gaming machine may be, for example, one that performs variable display.

(Modification 5)
In the above embodiment, by determining the jackpot type at the start of fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is set to the “probably changed state”, but at the start of fluctuation, the big winning opening pattern ( Only the mode of the round game) is determined, and based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within the special winning opening) during the big hit game state, the game state after the big hit game state is the "probability change state". May be set to.

(Modification 6)
In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of a change pattern indicating a change time and a change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, one change pattern command is issued when the change is started. Although the example of transmitting is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-relation, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc., before reaching the reach (so-called when the reach is not reached. A command indicating the change time and change mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery effect, etc., after the reach is reached (so-called the first when the reach is not reached). It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the fluctuation time or the fluctuation mode after 2 stops). In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

(Modification 7)
A plurality of timings at which one notification can be executed may be provided (for example, a timing before the reach is established and a timing after the reach is established). In this case, the execution timing may be determined by lottery or the like, and the jackpot expectation may be changed according to the execution timing.

(Modification 7)
In addition, the image display operation in the image display device and the voice output operation in the speaker for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. Various effect operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

(A configuration in which at least a part of the above-described embodiments and the like is taken as an example)
Next, a description will be given of a configuration and a further modified example of which at least a part of the above-described embodiments and modified examples is an example. A gaming machine may be configured as well.

(1) A gaming machine for playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like),
Present a plurality of selection candidates (for example, runners, etc.) (for example, make two runners appear in a race production), and select one of the presented selection candidates (for example, a race production A selection means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) to win one of the two runners,
As the selectable candidates that can be presented, a first selectable candidate (for example, a blue runner and a green runner (a runner of the first group) having a relatively low expectation of a big hit) and a first selectable candidate when selected. A second selection candidate having a high degree of advantage (for example, a big hit expectation degree) (for example, a red runner and a rainbow runner (a second group of runners) having a relatively high big hit expectation degree);
When the first selection candidate is not included in the presented plurality of selection candidates (for example, only a red runner or a rainbow runner appears in the race production. That is, the selection means presented Than when the first selection candidate is included in the presented multiple selection candidates (for example, when the candidate includes only the second selection candidate) (for example, when a blue or green runner appears in the race production) Do not select any of the plurality of selection candidates at a high rate (see, for example, FIG. 20 and FIG. 21) (for example, a pattern in which both runners stop the race in the race effect),
A gaming machine characterized by that (the contents and determination ratio of the effect patterns in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, etc. may be changed so that at least this condition is satisfied).

  The gaming machine may be an enclosed gaming machine that encapsulates a game medium and gives points based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the gaming machine may be a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to one in which the number of bets is set by using medals and credits as a gaming value, and is only a slot machine in which the number of bets is set by using a gaming ball as a gaming value or only credits as a gaming value. It may be a fully-credit type slot machine in which the bet amount is set using.

  As for the degree of advantage, for example, when a certain event occurs (when a race effect or the like is executed), a state actually advantageous to the player (a privilege (a big hit game state, a BB state in a slot machine, an AT state, etc.) is given. Or the ratio of being granted, the ratio of privilege granting is high, an advantageous condition different from the privilege, etc. (a big hit expectation degree, etc.), or the ratio of being in an advantageous condition (for example, , In a latent state where it is difficult to determine whether or not the current state is the probabilistic state, the ratio of the probable state is the present).

  The effect of presenting and selecting a plurality of selection candidates by the selecting means (hereinafter, also referred to as a selection effect, including a mode not selected) may be any effect. For example, as a race effect, three or more runners may race. Further, it may be a battle effect in which two or more characters battle each other (when the character wins, that character is selected). Further, it may be a selection effect in which any one of two or more options is selected by roulette or the like, such as a roulette effect.

  The selection effect may be an effect in which two or more color candidates are presented and selected in order to notify which color the display mode (for example, color) of the hold display image is changed in the prefetch notice (after that). , The color of the hold display image is changed to the color selected in the selection effect. When no candidate is selected, the color of the hold display image is not changed (for example, the prefetching notice is not executed). The pre-reading notice is a pre-reading judgment (judgment of a variable display (special game) on hold corresponding to the random number, which is a target), based on the random number value MR1 extracted at the time of winning the start prize. It is based on the result. Pre-reading judgment is whether the target is a big hit, whether the target fluctuation pattern specifies the reach, whether the target fluctuation pattern specifies a specific reach (super reach, etc.), etc. Therefore, it may be performed using the tables shown in FIGS. The pre-reading determination may be executed by the CPU 103 for effect control, as well as executed by the CPU 120 for effect control (in this case, an effect control command indicating MR1 or the like is supplied to the effect control board 12). Whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed is performed by the effect control CPU 120. For example, the look-ahead notice notifies the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target will be in a predetermined state (the degree of expectation of a big hit, the degree of expectation of reach, etc.) by changing the color of the pending display image corresponding to the target. It is sufficient (the degree of expectation differs depending on which color. Therefore, the color candidates presented in the selection effect have the same degree of expectation as the color of the hold display image). If the predetermined state is the reach state or the like, the look-ahead notice eventually gives a notice of the jackpot expectation degree of the target.

  When the variable display corresponding to the pending display image (first and second pending display images) is executed, the pending display image is displayed as an image (active display image) corresponding to the variable display in execution. It may be displayed in a predetermined area (active display image) on the screen of the device 5. In this case, you may make it perform the active change production which changes the display mode (for example, color) of the said active display image (The big hit expectation degree is notified by the display mode after a change, etc.). The selection effect may be, for example, an effect in which two or more color candidates are presented and selected in order to inform which color the color of the active display image is changed during execution of the variable display (after that). , The color of the active display image is changed to the color selected in the selection effect. When no candidate is selected, the color of the active display image is not changed (for example, the active change effect is not executed). Whether or not the active change effect is executed and the display mode after the change may be determined based on the look-ahead determination or may be performed based on the variable display result or the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 16. Good.

  Note that the effect control CPU 120 may change the display mode of the hold display image and the active display image a plurality of times during the period from the start winning to the end of the display of the active display image (for example, a plurality of variable displays respectively. Change it with). In this case, the transition pattern of changes is collectively determined based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, the determined pattern is held in the RAM 122, and when the execution of the variable display up to the target is started, the held pattern is referred to, It may be determined whether to change the display mode of the hold display image or the active display image (whether to execute the selection effect). It should be noted that only the hold display image may be changed a plurality of times, and in this case also, the transition pattern of change may be collectively determined based on the determination result of the prefetch determination.

  As described above, the gaming machine is provided with means for displaying an image corresponding to the variable display (variable display which has not been started yet or is being executed) and means for changing the display mode of the image, and the selection is made. The effect may be to present a candidate corresponding to the display mode after the change of the image as a selection candidate (when the image is changed to the display mode corresponding to the selected candidate, when no candidate is selected, Do not change the display mode, etc.).

  Further, as the selection effect, a selection candidate corresponding to the reach effect is presented and selected (the selected reach effect is executed. Therefore, the selection candidate also has the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect). Selection candidates corresponding to notice effects such as cut-in effects that predict big hit expectation (effects in which cuts that are unrelated to the flow up to that point are inserted in the middle of other notification effects or reach effects) (each differ A selection candidate corresponding to a type of notice effect may be presented and selected (the selected notice effect is executed. Therefore, the selection candidate also has a jackpot expectation degree of the notice effect), or the present. In the latent state, when a selection is made, a selection candidate for notifying the possibility that the current state is the probability changing state may be presented and selected. In addition, the selection effect may be executed as a mini game in a small area of the image display device 5.

  Two or more same selection candidates (selection candidates having the same advantage when selected) may be presented in one selection effect (all presented selection candidates may be the same). The number of selection candidates included in the first selection candidate may be one or more. One or more selection candidates may be included in the second selection candidates. The “second selection candidate having a higher degree of advantage than the first selection candidate” means that the respective selection degrees of all selection candidates included in the second selection candidate are higher than those of the first selection candidate having the highest degree of advantage. Is also high (the same applies to other high and low advantages). Further, the plurality of selectable candidates that can be presented include only the first selectable candidate and the second selectable candidate (that is, all the selectable candidates are classified into either the first selectable candidate or the second selectable candidate). ) Is preferable, but the third selection candidate, the fourth selection candidate... (For example, a candidate having a higher advantage than the first selection candidate and a lower advantage than the second selection candidate, or the first selection candidate). A candidate having a low degree of advantage, a candidate having a higher degree of advantage than the second selection candidate, and the like may be included.

  When no selection candidate is selected, a selection candidate that has not been presented this time (a selection candidate that can be presented in the selection effect) may newly appear and be selected (for example, a red runner and a rainbow runner may race. Canceled, and then the blue runner wins).

  The advantage when the selection candidate is not selected is lower than any advantage of the selection candidates presented at that time (the advantage when selected) or any advantage of the presentable selection candidates. Thus, for example, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the selection effect in a mode in which the first selection candidates are not included in the plurality of presented selection candidates, and it is possible to enhance the effect. The advantage when the selection candidate is not selected may be higher than the advantage when the selection candidate is selected (for example, when the red runner and the rainbow runner race and both stop the race) The expectation of a big hit is higher than the expectation of a big hit when the rainbow runner wins.) In this case, the staging effect can be enhanced by increasing the expectation that no selection candidate is selected. Further, the advantage when no selection candidate is selected may be the same as the advantage when the selection candidate is selected, or may be lower than the highest advantage of each selection candidate and higher than the lowest advantage. (For example, when a red runner and a rainbow runner race and both stop racing, the jackpot expectation is the same as when the rainbow or red runner wins, or the rainbow runner It is lower than the jackpot expectation when you win, and higher than the jackpot expectation when the red runner wins.) In this case, it is possible to equalize the execution frequency of each variation of the selected effect and enhance the effect of effect.

  The selection candidates presented by the selection effect may include a candidate that gives 1 point to the meter M when selected. In this case, the jackpot expectation of the meter M after giving points may be the advantage when the selection candidate is selected, or the increase of the jackpot expectation by giving points is when the selection candidate is selected. May be advantageous. Also, the number of points to be given may be different depending on the selection candidate. As described above, the selection candidate may be one that changes the display mode of the predetermined display (meter M or the like) described later (and notifies that the display mode is changed) when selected. ..

  With the above configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced. In particular, when the first selection candidate is not included in the presented plurality of selection candidates, the selection means selects one of the plurality of selection candidates at a higher rate than when the first selection candidate is included in the presented plurality of selection candidates. By also not selecting, even when the first selection candidate is not included in the presented plurality of selection candidates, it is possible to see with a sense of tension which option is selected, and enhance the effect of production. be able to.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The selection means can present a plurality of selection candidates at a plurality of timings including a first timing and a second timing (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
The ratio of selecting any of the plurality of selection candidates is different when the plurality of selection candidates that do not include the first selection candidate are presented at the first timing and when the plurality of selection candidates are presented at the second timing (for example, , See FIG. 21),
(The content and determination rate of the effect patterns in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, etc. may be changed so that at least this condition is satisfied).

  When the second timing comes later than the first timing, the proportion of selecting any one of the plurality of selection candidates may be lower at the second timing.

  With the above configuration, the presentation timing of the selection candidates is paid attention to, and the effect of production is enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further provided is a special effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for executing a special effect having a high degree of advantage (for example, one-shot notification),
When a plurality of selection candidates that do not include the first selection candidate are presented, one of the plurality of selection candidates when the special effect is executed is more than when the special effect is not executed. A high percentage of selecting (for example, see FIG. 21)
(The content and determination rate of the effect patterns in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, etc. may be changed so that at least this condition is satisfied).

  In the above embodiment, the special effect is a one-time notification, but the special effect does not have to be a one-time notification of a big hit confirmation. For example, it may be a notice production that notifies that the degree of advantage such as a jackpot expectation degree is higher than a predetermined reference (the jackpot is not confirmed) (the presentation mode may be changed).

  With the above configuration, the special effect is noticed and the effect of the effect is enhanced.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The advantage when no one of the plurality of selection candidates is selected is lower than the advantage when one of the plurality of selection candidates is selected (see, for example, FIGS. 20 and 21),
(The content and determination rate of the effect patterns in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, etc. may be changed so that at least this condition is satisfied).

  With the above configuration, the player pays attention to whether or not the selection candidate is selected, so that it is possible to enhance the effect.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The selection means is
It is possible to present a plurality of selection candidates at a plurality of timings including the first timing and a second timing after the first timing (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
A plurality of selection candidates are presented so that the respective degrees of advantage of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the second timing are not lower than the degrees of advantage of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the first timing (for example, FIG. 21),
(The content and determination rate of the effect patterns in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, etc. may be changed so that at least this condition is satisfied).

  With such a configuration, the player's discouragement can be prevented and the effect of production can be enhanced. The target that is not lowered may be the advantage of the selection candidate selected by the selection unit, the advantage when the selection candidate is not selected, or the like.

  The advantages of each of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the second timing may be less likely to be lower than the advantages of each of the plurality of selection candidates presented at the first timing. For example, in the production pattern of the race effect, a pattern having a low advantage is prepared, but the determination rate of the pattern is set lower than the pattern in which the advantage does not decrease. Further, the target that is not easily lowered may be the advantage of the selection candidate selected by the selection unit, the advantage when the selection candidate is not selected, or the like. Even in this case, for example, in the production pattern for the race effect, a pattern having a low advantage is prepared, but the determination rate of the pattern is set to be lower than the pattern in which the advantage does not decrease. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of player discouragement and the like, and to enhance the effect of production.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
A predetermined display control unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120 according to the modified example 1) capable of stepwise changing the display mode of the predetermined display (for example, the meter M or the like) according to the degree of advantage;
After performing a common introduction effect (for example, an effect that displays the card G and "pseudo-repeat?"), succeeding effect (for example, turn over the card G, and turn over the flipped card G, the word "pseudo-repeat" Execute a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-interconnection effect) that performs any one of a certain effect) and a failure effect (for example, an effect in which the card G is turned over and the card G that is turned over has nothing written on it). A specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the modified example 1),
The specific effect execution means is configured to perform the failure effect during a predetermined period (for example, another effect execution restriction period) after being notified that the display mode of the predetermined display is changed. Restricting execution of continuous production (failure, etc.) (see, for example, FIG. 27),
You may do it.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the failure effect being executed without limitation during the predetermined period.

  The advantage here may be a kind of advantage different from the advantage (1) or the like (the subject is different from the advantage (1) or the like).

  The predetermined display is such that a plurality of characters or figures are displayed only in silhouette or in a mode such as semi-transparent that is difficult to see, and the display mode is changed step by step by sequentially changing the characters or figures to normal display. It may change.

  The display mode of the predetermined display may be changeable at a plurality of timings. In such a case, it is possible to prevent anxiety that the display mode of the predetermined display will not change anymore due to the failure effect, without restriction, and to prevent a decrease in the entertainment of the game.

  The end of the predetermined period may be any timing.

  The change in the display mode of the predetermined display, the specific effect, or the like may be a kind of prefetching notice or the like based on the prefetching determination. In this case, the predetermined period (such as another effect execution restriction period) may be until the end of the variable display of the target, or until the end of the variable display that is being executed when notifying that the display mode of the predetermined display changes. May be Also, any other timing may be used. Further, the change of the display mode of the predetermined display, the specific effect, and the like may be realized by various other effects. The change of the display mode of the predetermined display may be performed when the selection candidate selected by the selection effect is a specific candidate (the notification of the change is, for example, that the specific candidate itself is selected. May be).

  The specific effect, for example, stimulates whether or not other effects such as pseudo-relation, super reach, look-ahead notice, etc. are executed (introduction effect), and notifies or suggests that it is executed (success effect), or is not executed. It may be any effect or the like that notifies or suggests that (failure effect). Further, the specific effect may be the point giving effect. In this case, after the arrow P2 and the target P1 (moving up and down) are displayed and before the arrow P2 is fired, the introduction effect is, the effect in which the arrow P2 hits the target P1 is the success effect, and the arrow P2 is the target P1. The production which does not hit (is out) is the failure production. As described above, the specific effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the predetermined display is changed (including notifying that the change is performed) by the success effect and the display mode of the predetermined display is not changed by the failure effect. . The effect executed when notifying that the display mode of the predetermined display changes (the effect capable of notifying that the display mode of the predetermined display changes) and the specific effect described above are the same executed at a plurality of timings. It may be a production.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

  In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and it is intended that the meaning equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, in addition, a gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.),
Present a plurality of selection candidates (for example, runners, etc.) (for example, make two runners appear in a race production), and select one of the presented selection candidates (for example, a race production And the selection means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) to win one of the two runners.
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for performing a specific display production),
And a special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for making an abnormality notification),
As the selectable candidates that can be presented, a first selectable candidate (for example, a blue runner and a green runner (a runner of the first group) having a relatively low expectation of a big hit) and a first selectable candidate when selected. A second selection candidate having a high degree of advantage (for example, a big hit expectation degree) (for example, a red runner and a rainbow runner (a second group of runners) having a relatively high big hit expectation degree);
The selection means, when the first selection candidate is not included in the plurality of presented selection candidates (for example, only a red runner or a rainbow runner appears in a race production), the plurality of presented selection candidates Any of a plurality of selection candidates at a higher ratio (for example, see FIGS. 20 and 21) than when the first selection candidate is included in the candidates (for example, when a blue or green runner appears in the race production). Do not select (for example, a pattern in which both runners stop the race in the race production),
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period of time elapses after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, when the icon as the specific display is displayed, The specific display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed (the specific display changes, etc.),
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed. It is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, it is possible to grasp the game situation even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, "presentation of presenting a plurality of selection candidates and selecting one of the presented plurality of selection candidates" (also referred to as "selection production") and "gradual change depending on the degree of advantage" "Production for performing specific display" and "special notification for notifying information about game" may be executed at the same time or may be executed individually. Further, when they are executed at the same time, they may be displayed overlappingly on the image display device or may be displayed so as not to overlap. For example, in one variable display, first, "the effect of performing a specific display that can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage" is performed, then the selection effect is performed, or the selection effect is performed first, and then It is possible to adopt a mode in which “a production in which a specific display that can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage is performed” is performed.

  In the above gaming machine, the display mode of the selected effect may change during the effect. In addition, special notification regarding the selection effect, such as a special notification for notifying that the display mode of the selection effect changes or a special notification for suggesting the effect result of the selection effect, may be executed.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the entertainment level,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.),
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for performing a specific display production),
And a special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for making an abnormality notification),
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period of time elapses after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, when the icon as the specific display is displayed, The specific display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed (the specific display changes, etc.),
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed. It is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter),
A gaming machine characterized by that. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, one embodiment relating to another embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball hitting launch device and is driven into it.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 28, on the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), etc., and is identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also called “special symbols”) that are possible plural types of identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (variably displayed). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  Symbol numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of types of special symbols are attached. As an example, each of the numbers indicating “0” to “9” is assigned a symbol number of “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number of “10”. Just do it. In the following, the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B are also referred to as "second special symbols". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, the numbers indicating “0” to “9” and the symbol indicating “−”), or the types may be different. It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B may be respectively configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99", for example. .

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game, respectively. In the decorative pattern display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions such as three, for example, decorative patterns that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in the special figure game, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 904B, The variation (for example, vertical scroll display) of the decorative pattern is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in the image display device 905. The fixed decorative design (final stop design) that is the variable display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A, or a special character diagram using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronism with the drawing game, a plurality of types of decorative designs that can be identified are variably displayed, and the fixed decorative design that is the variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means terminating the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the decorative symbol in a stop display (also called a complete stop display or a final stop display). . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, the variable speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The design may be displayed in a stopped state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion/contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitely displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes Note that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative pattern in a complete stop display for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing a slight shake or expansion/contraction.

  The decorative patterns variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R include, for example, eight types of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters). It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A corresponding design number is attached to each of the decorative designs. For example, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lost combination can be configured.

  After the variable display of the decorative design is started, the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed until the fixed decorative design which is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow from upper to lower sequentially from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, As a result, the decorative design with the smallest design number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (such as the "left" decorative pattern display area 905L), scroll display is performed from a large symbol number to a small symbol number, When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed subsequently.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning a prize memory display area 905H is arranged. In the starting prize winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display is displayed that allows the number of variable displays held for a special figure game (special figure reserved memory number) to be specified. Here, in the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first start winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It is generated based on the winning a prize for starting (entering). That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special drawing game and the variable display of the decorative pattern is established, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 28, along with the start winning a prize memory display area 905H, the first special hold for displaying the special figure hold storage number in a specifiable manner at the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of memories for which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending. The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply saying "the number of special figure reservation storages", it usually means a concept including all of the number of first special figure reservation storages, the number of second special figure reservation storages, and the total number of reservation storages. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are included but the total reserved storage number is excluded).

  Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a normal open state in which it is in a vertical position and an expanded open state in which it is in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning hole. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is on. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. Although the normal variable winning ball device 906B allows the game ball to enter the second start winning port even in the normal open state, the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning ball device 906B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and in a normally opened state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 29. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting port switch 9022B shown in FIG. 29. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start opening switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of award balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the number of award balls paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning prize ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. To form a big prize hole.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. 29, for example. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball is opened to another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when they passed (entered). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening, and for the player. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 28, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of LEDs of a 7-segment or dot matrix similar to the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary pattern (also referred to as "general drawing" or "normal drawing") is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a normal figure game (also called "normal figure game").

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, a universal figure hold display 9025C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general prize holes is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operating handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor of the ball launching device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operation rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. It suffices that a trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 901. Pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). It is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate or the like at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko game machine 901, such as that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 9041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 29, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 9020. After the universal figure starting condition for is satisfied, for example, the previous universal figure game is finished, based on that the universal figure start condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol display 9020 The public figure game by is started.

  In this public figure game, after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when the predetermined time which is the general figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped (displayed). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is "ordinary symbol loss". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol hit", the expansion opening control (tilt control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilted position is performed. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, after the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 29, for example, The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. After that, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by ending the previous special figure game or the big hit game state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the variable display of the special symbol The finalized special symbol (result of special symbol display) that results is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the result is "big hit", and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the numbers “2” are the small hit symbols. , The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, the special symbols common to both special symbol games may be the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 907 has a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The special winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

  The special winning a prize sphere device, by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closing the special winning a prize, the special award winning entrance door whose big award winning mouth is opened during the execution of the round. 907 is changed to a second state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15"). Even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball has not been won in the special winning opening). ..

  Of the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5" and "7" which are big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are usually open round big hit symbols and the number "5" The special design that indicates is a short-term open round jackpot design. In the jackpot gaming state (normally open jackpot state) as the normal opening round specific game state that is controlled after the normal opening round jackpot symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game, the special winning a prize ball device 907 special winning opening The door opens the special winning opening until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds), which is the first period, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed. The normal open jackpot state is also called the first specific game state.

  Short-term open round as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the big hit symbol is derived. The upper limit time (upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened by the special winning opening door) for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player is shorter than the first period in the normally open big hit state (for example, 0 . 1 second). It should be noted that in the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-time open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payout balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins the big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds or the like), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which the payout (prize ball) is not substantially obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also called the second specific game state.

  In addition, the big hit game state as a short-term open round specific game state is not limited to one in which the period of opening the special winning opening is shorter than that of the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific playing state. For example, opening of the special winning opening The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) for opening the special winning opening is It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period during which the big winning opening is changed to the first state where the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal open round specific game state. It is only necessary that at least one of the short second period and the second round number in which the number of executions of the round is smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hitting game state, the variable winning operation for changing the special winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is performed in the special variable winning ball device 907 as in the short-term open big hitting state. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) is repeatedly executed for the second period.

  In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A. Of the special figure games using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 904B, corresponding to the start of any special figure game, variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Then, from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state is a decorative pattern that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (“reach variation pattern”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative patterns are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. Specifically, in part of the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905R, etc.) The remaining decorative pattern display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern indicating the alphanumeric character "7") that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the design display area 905C or the like), the decorative pattern is changing, or the decoration pattern is a big hit in all or part of the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. It is a display state in which all or a part of the combination is changed while changing in synchronization.

  In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative pattern, or changing the changing mode of the decorative pattern, a performance effect different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The effect operation such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, etc. are put in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also called "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different in each reach mode. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are preset. When the reach mode of the super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit expectation degree) becomes higher than that when the reach mode of the normal reach appears.

  During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be the reach state, the variable display result may be a "big hit", etc. A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed by a variable display mode of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-run" can be executed. Whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” or “pseudo-relation” is executed in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 9011 side may be determined. Whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is executed on the effect control board 9012 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main board 9011 side.

  In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, After the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design is displayed. By changing the decorative pattern again in the decorative pattern display area (for example, either or both of the “left” decorative pattern display area 905L and the “right” decorative pattern display area 905R), the display is stopped. The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of "slip", a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is changed to the reach state by executing the variable display again for the decorative pattern of No., and when the decorative pattern forming the non-reach combination is not stopped and the stop pattern is displayed. is there.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable display is started after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once. After temporarily displaying the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R until the finalized decorative design as a result is derived and displayed, The effect display for changing (re-changing) the decorative pattern again in all the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of pseudo-continuous variations in this embodiment is “left”, “middle”, and “right” except for the initial variation from the start of variable display of decorative designs to the temporary suspension of all decorative designs. The number of times the decorative design is changed again in all of the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-run chances Once the decorative pattern configuring the above is temporarily displayed as a predetermined display result, after that, the variable display (re-fluctuation) is performed again. The pseudo consecutive chances may include a combination of decorative patterns that is a predetermined non-reach combination instead of the variable display mode of decorative patterns being the reach mode. In addition, the pseudo consecutive chance may include a combination of decorative patterns that becomes a predetermined reach-miss combination (also simply referred to as a “reach combination”) after the variable display mode of the decorative patterns becomes the reach mode. For example, in the pseudo continuous chance eye, the decoration pattern (middle pattern) stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 905C is a special decorative pattern (pseudo continuous chance pattern) that is not used in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the normal time. ) Is good. Among the decorative patterns that are also used in the variable display of the decorative patterns at the normal time, the pseudo continuous chance pattern which is the pseudo continuous chance by being stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 905C may be included. .

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous", re-fluctuation (pseudo continuous variation) is performed, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The variable display can be made to appear as if it was started multiple times in succession. In addition, in the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous" in the present embodiment, the re-variation (pseudo continuous change) is supposed to be performed at most once for easy understanding. The number of times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation in may be performed more than once, for example, twice or three times. In addition, in the variable display of "pseudo continuous" in this embodiment, the pseudo display that temporarily displays the temporary stop and then changes again (that is, whether the pseudo continuous opportunity displays the temporary stop) is simulated. The continuous production is executed. Specifically, in the pseudo continuous production, the "left" and "right" decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and the pseudo continuous chance pattern is displayed (the pseudo continuous chance common to the success production and the failure production described later). A design is displayed), and an effect of driving whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance design is temporarily stopped is displayed. The mode in which the pseudo-repeated chance symbol is stopped and displayed is called success production, and the mode in which the temporary stop display is not displayed is called failure production. As described above, in the variable display effect of “pseudo run” in this embodiment, the re-change is performed at most once. Therefore, the change pattern of the pseudo run that is not re-changed is re-changed. This is a variation pattern of the gaze that just stirs up the thing (referred to as a variation pattern of the pseudo continuous gas), and when the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is performed based on the change pattern, the failure effect is executed. Become. In addition, instead of displaying a special decorative design such as a pseudo continuous chance design in the pseudo continuous production, or together with the stop display of the special decorative design, each variable display by the variable display production of "pseudo continuous" (first variation During a period (including), a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 (displayed as a common introduction effect).

  As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of such a decorative pattern, in addition to “slip” and “pseudo-relation”, for example, “developing opportunity eye”, “developing opportunity eye end”, “chance eye stop slip” Various performance operations such as the above may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of "development opportunity eye", from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, "left", "middle", "right" In all of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the decorative patterns constituting the development opportunity eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped, and then the variable display state of the decorative patterns is reached. As a predetermined reach effect is started. As a result, when the decorative pattern forming the development opportunity is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state. Expectations are increased.

  Further, in the variable display effect of "end of development opportunity eye", after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, all of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are displayed. The effect display is performed in which the decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as the development opportunity item is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", like the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in all, after the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern of the miss combination (special combination), which is the pseudo consecutive chance. Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-run" in which the decorative pattern is changed again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the decorative pattern is changed again in a part of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. By doing so, effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is called a “non-reach” (also called “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect has been executed, or without the reach effect being executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “miss”.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” and the special variable jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “7” are stopped. When it is displayed, in response to the variable display state of the decorative pattern becoming the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, a combination of a plurality of jackpots Among them, the fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative symbols that are a combination of big hits are, for example, the symbol numbers variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905. Any one of the decorative patterns of "8" is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Anything will do.

  Whether or not to control to a probability change state after the jackpot game state is finished during execution of a predetermined round in the jackpot game state after the fixed decorative pattern which is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed (whether a certain variation is given as a privilege? The promotion effect during the big hit, which is a bonus-giving effect, is executed. Although details will be described later, in the big hit mid-promotion effect, for example, a battle effect in which characters fight each other in the display area of the image display device 905 may be performed. Then, the player may be notified so as to be able to recognize whether or not the main character is promoted or defeated to be in the probable change state after the jackpot gaming state is ended (whether or not the probable change is given as a privilege). In addition, during the big hit promotion production, the round in the big hit game state is not being executed, and at the start of the big hit game state or the period from the end of one round in the big hit game state to the start of the next round, It may be performed in a period from the end of the final round in the big hit game state to the start of the next variable display game. In addition, the jackpot mid-promotion promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the jackpot gaming state ends. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state is sometimes called "ending promotion production".

  In the jackpot promotion promotion notification, the fact that the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is in the probable state will be announced (notifying that a privilege will be given). Yes (notifies that the privilege is not granted) There is a promotion failure during big hit. Then, in the case where the promotion success effect during the big hit is executed, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is controlled to the probability change state. On the other hand, when the big hit mid-promotion failure effect is performed, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is not controlled to the probable variation state (non-probability variation state), but is controlled to the time saving state. In the probability change state, in the variable display of each special figure game and the decorative pattern, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is improved to be higher than the normal state or the time saving state. . Such a probability variation state continues regardless of the number of times the special figure game is executed until the next variable display result is a "big hit". The time saving state is a gaming state in which the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after power-on). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. In such a time saving state, when one of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is established first, finish.

  In the probability change state and the time saving state, the control for shortening the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular symbol game by the regular symbol display 9020 (general symbol variation time) to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variation of the regular symbol in each regular symbol game Control for improving the probability that the display result is "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the time saving state, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. In this way, the control in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning port in the probability changing state or the time saving state and which is advantageous to the player is also called high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second starting winning opening being in the expanded opening state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the probability changing state and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state is more likely to occur than in the normal state (the gaming state is advantageous to the player). The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to either the probability changing state or the time saving state. .. Also, when the high opening control period, it is also said that the gaming state is in a high base. On the other hand, when it is not in the high opening control period, it is also said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state also called a low certainty high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state also called a low certainty low base state. In addition, the probability variation state is a gaming state which is also referred to as a high precision high base state. In other words, when the big hit middle promotion success production is executed, the game state after the big hit game state is finished is controlled to be the probable variation state, so that it is controlled to the highly precise and high base state. On the other hand, when the big hit mid-promotion failure production is performed, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is not controlled to the probable state (non-probable variation state), but is controlled to the time saving state, so the low-probability high-base It will be controlled by the state.

  The probability variation state may include a state in which the time variation control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control, and a state in which the time variation control and the high opening control are not performed but only the probability variation control is performed. As an example, after the 15-round big hit state based on the variable display result in the special figure game being "probability change big hit", after the end of the 15th round big hit state, the time change control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control. It is controlled to the base state). After that, when the special figure display result does not become a “big hit” and the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the probability variation control is continuously performed, but the time saving control and the high opening control are performed. May be controlled to a second certainty change state (also referred to as a high accuracy low base state) which is not performed after completion of. In addition, after the 2-round big hit state based on the variable display result in the special drawing game being "a sudden big hit" in the normal state, the state changes to the second positive change state and only the positive change control is performed. However, the time saving control and the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the 2-round big hit state based on the variable display result in the special figure game being “probable big hit” in the probability changing state or the time saving state, the state shifts to the first probability changing state, Time reduction control and high opening control may be performed together with the probability variation control. Alternatively, after the 15-round big hit state based on the "probable variation big hit", the first probability variation state is controlled until the special figure display result becomes "big hit" again, while the 2 round big jackpot state based on the "probable big hit" After the end, the state shifts to the first probability variation state, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without the special figure display result being "big hit", the state shifts to the second probability variation state. You may. The time saving control and the high opening control are started and ended at the same time (in conjunction with each other), but the start and the end of the probability variation control are not necessarily linked with the start and the end of the time saving control and the high opening control. You may.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative design may not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative designs predetermined as the opening opportunity may be stopped and displayed. Further, as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the short open round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After that, the fixed decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern which becomes a chance eye corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "attack probability" (also referred to as "attack probability jackpot" or "sudden probability big hit"). The short-term open big hit state may be controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “hit” big hit type.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled. After the end, the game state is not changed, and the variable display result is continuously controlled to the state before the small hit. However, if the special drawing game in which the variable display result is “small hit” is executed and the number of executions of the special drawing game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the end of the small hit game state, The special game state may end and the normal state may occur.

  When the special winning design that constitutes the opening chance eye is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative design, and the special winning opening is in the open state, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" There are times when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state based on that, and when it is controlled to a small hit game state based on that the variable display result is "small hit". On the other hand, the reason why the special winning opening is opened after the fixed decorative pattern forming the reach combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative pattern is that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" Only when it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state based on this. Therefore, the fixed decorative pattern constituting the opening chance eye corresponds to being controlled to both the short-term open big hit state and the small hit game state, while the fixed decorative pattern of the reach combination is the short-term open big hit state. It corresponds to being controlled by.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 29, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a production control board 9012. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, a segment LED) that constitutes the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting/lighting/coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a control function.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100 and a switch circuit 90110 that captures detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. , Various circuits for controlling a performance operation by electric effect parts such as a game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the production control board 9012 produces all or part of the display operation in the image display device 905 and the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the lighting/extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 909 and the like. It is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for use to execute a predetermined effect operation.

  The voice control board 9013 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sounds from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A lamp driver circuit for driving is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 29, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 is connected to the main substrate 9011. Note that the gate switch 9021, the first starting opening switch 9022A, the second starting opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a sensor. Anything you have is acceptable. In addition, on the main board 9011, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, the first holding display device 9025A, the second holding display device 9025B, the universal figure holding display device 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It also includes a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data indicating a random number value is updated independently of the CPU 90103. A random number circuit 90104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 90105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101 to read fixed data, the CPU 90103 writes variable data to the RAM 90102 to temporarily store various data, and the variable data write operation causes the CPU 90103 to store various floating data to the RAM 90102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105, and a CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105. The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used to control the progress of the game. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, to regularly or irregularly update various numerical data by software, thereby making a part of various random number values. You may make it count the numerical data which show. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be one for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data that configures a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 90101, table data forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns are configured. Table data etc. to be stored are stored.

  FIG. 30 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Among the cases where the display result is "big hit", when the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probability change" and "probability", and further, when the variable display result is "small hit" Correspondingly, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach is executed. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The super reach variation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A and super reach B regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "miss". In the illustrated example, the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation" is performed in the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or the case where the variable display result is "miss". However, even when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probability”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable display effect of “pseudo-link” may be performed. Further, although the variation pattern in which the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation" is performed is a super reach variation pattern, it may be a normal reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern. Similarly, with regard to the variation pattern of pseudo continuous gaze, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", the variable display result is "small hit", normal reach or non-reach Good. Further, as described above, the illustrated example shows an example in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation is at most once, but there are fluctuation patterns that can be executed more than once, such as twice and three times. May be. In addition, variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo continuous” may be performed in other variation patterns shown in the figure.

  The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 29 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, part or all of the content of the RAM 90102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like. Further, the data according to the control state and the data showing the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data showing the progress state of the game. Such a RAM 90102 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The I/O 90105 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 is for inputting various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100, and for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the production control board 9012 is provided with a production control CPU 90120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area for the production control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical value data indicating a random value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124 and an I/O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 90121 for a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variable data in the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores various data, and the effect control CPU 90120 causes the RAM 90122 to write. A fluctuation data read operation for reading out various temporarily stored fluctuation data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I/O 90125, and an effect control CPU 90120 performs an I/O operation. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, a wire for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, To the lamp control board 9014, wiring for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating the lamp data is connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation action of the player for the stick controller 9031A is transmitted from the controller sensor unit 9035A, and a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like, the numerical value data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation are updatable counted. The random number used for controlling such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 29, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, in the ROM 90121, table data forming a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the production control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data forming various production control patterns, and the like. Remembered

  As an example, in the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, the effect model, and the like). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special figure change time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns may be stored.

  The special figure variation time production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special figure game until the definite display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result is displayed. , Variable display operation of decorative design, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, or various effect display operation without variable display of decorative design, etc. Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control content of the effect operation which is the advance notice effect executed corresponding to the advance notice patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are made up of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The special figure variation time production control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns in which the production mode in each reach production is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach production.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the effect control pattern (special figure variation effect control pattern) based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designating command when, for example, variably displaying the decorative pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when starting execution of a predetermined effect such as an effect effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, or the applicable effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be specified. A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the voice control board 9013, or the like. In the display control unit 90123 that has received the command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM for development. Further, in the voice control board 9013 which receives the command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like for development. . After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to various corresponding control data. Control.

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets necessary interrupt settings after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 90102 is cleared, for example. In addition, register setting of CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When initialization is completed, interrupts are enabled and loop processing is entered. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be started.

  When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform a gate switch 9021, a first starting port switch 9022A, a second starting port switch 9022B, and a count via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (step). S9013).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1' to MR3' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9014). After this, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform operation control, opening/closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S9016). The CPU 90103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 9020 by executing the normal symbol process process, and the variable display of the regular symbol and the movable variable regular winning ball device 906B. It enables setting of tilting motion of winglets.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I/O 90105, the performance control board 9012 is output corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for a predetermined time and then to the off state. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing performed in step S9015 of FIG. In the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90101 of FIG. 32 as the starting winning determination processing.

  In the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 90103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. It is determined whether the starting opening switch 9022A is on (step S90201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 9022A is on (step S90201; Yes), the number of reserved special memories for the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S90202). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. When the number of first special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to "1" (step S90203).

  When the first starting opening switch 9022A is off in step S90201 (step S90201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; Yes), it is normal. Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 906B, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 9022B is ON ( Step S90204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 9022B is on (step S90204; Yes), the second special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is set (step S90205). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. When the number of second special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to "2" (step S90206).

  After performing either of the processes of steps S90203 and S90206, the special figure reservation storage number corresponding to the starting port buffer value stored in the starting port buffer is updated by adding 1 (step S90207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second suspension storage count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90208). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

  After executing the processing of step S90208, the CPU 90103 selects, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 and the random counter of the RAM 90102, the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value for determining the jackpot type. Numerical data indicating MR2′ is extracted (step S90209). Random value MR1' for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special symbol in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result as "small hit" is small. It is a random number value used to determine whether to control the winning gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65535", for example. The random number value MR2′ for determining the jackpot type is determined to be one of “non-probable variation”, “probable variation”, and “probability” for the jackpot type which is the variable display mode of the decorative pattern when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. It is a random number value used for performing, and takes a value in the range of “0” to “99”, for example. By executing the process of step S90209, the CPU 90103 displays numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time. Extract. In this embodiment, the random number value MR1′ and the random number value MR2′ are extracted in the process of step S90209, but as described above, the random number value MR2′ is used to determine the jackpot type. Since it is a random number value, it may be extracted only when the determination result of the random number value MR1′ is “big hit”. In this case, the random number value MR2' may be extracted after it is determined Yes in step S90241 of FIG. 35 described later.

  Numerical data indicating each random value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1′ and MR2′ are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A as shown in FIG. When the mouth buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1' and MR2' are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B as shown in FIG. 34(B).

  In the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A shown in FIG. 34(A), the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) which has been started but has not been started is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates the winning number into the first starting winning opening (the order in which the game balls are detected) with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition for the passage (entry) of the game balls. Based on the establishment, the CPU 90103 uses the numeric data indicating the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like as the reserved data, and the number of stored memory is predetermined. The value is stored until the upper limit value (eg, “4”) is reached. The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result (special figure display Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that enables it to be determined whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  In the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B shown in FIG. 34(B), the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is given. The pending data of the special figure game that has occurred but has not yet started (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B associates the winning number into the second starting winning opening (detection order of the game ball) with the holding number, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 90103 uses the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type extracted from the random number circuit 90104 and the like as the reserved data, and the number thereof is predetermined. It is stored until the upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 90151B indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that enables it to be determined whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  In addition, with the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing (entering) of the gaming ball. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, start port data indicating which of the first start winning port and the second start winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  Following the processing of step S90210 shown in FIG. 33, the transmission setting of the starting mouth winning designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (step S90211). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. To send to 9012 the first start winning combination designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 904A has been established Set. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and so on, to the effect control board 9012. , The setting for transmitting the second starting mouth winning award designation command notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 904B is established .. The start mouth winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by, for example, executing a predetermined command control processing after the special symbol process processing is completed.

  After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 90101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the first special figure reservation storage number for the effect control board 9012. The setting for transmitting either the first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the number of the second reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number is performed (step S90212). The reservation storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by, for example, executing a predetermined command control processing after the special symbol process processing is completed. It should be noted that a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  After executing the processing of step S90212, it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S90213). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S90213; "1"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90214), and then step S90204. Proceed to processing. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S90213; "2"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90215). The start winning determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 9022A and the second starting opening switch 9022B simultaneously detect the effective winning start winning of the game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 of FIG. 32, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102.

  The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol based on the presence or absence of the pending data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 90151A and the second special symbol reservation storage unit 90151B. The display device 904B determines whether or not to start the special drawing game. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1' for determining the special symbol display result. , (Decision in advance) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B (big hit symbol or Either a small hit pattern or a lost pattern) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed using numerical data indicating a random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern, based on a result of pre-determining whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process of determining the pattern as one of a plurality of types. The random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, “1” to It takes a value in the range of "251". When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal process of step S90110 and the variation pattern setting process of step S90111, the variation pattern including the variable display time of the fixed special symbol or the special symbol and the decorative symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process, using the random number value MR1' for special symbol display result determination, the random number value MR2' for jackpot type determination, the random number value MR3' for variation pattern determination, the special symbol It also includes processing for determining the variable display mode of the decorative pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time from the start of variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. For example, each time the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value which is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the RAM 90102 is subtracted from or added to 1, and the first special symbol display device. Regardless of whether it is a special drawing game using the first special drawing in 904A or a special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 904B, the elapsed time can be measured by a common timer. Done. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A, and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. The variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure may be controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stop process of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stop display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol (deriving). It includes a process for making settings for the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is turned on. If the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". In addition, the special symbol stop process of step S90113 includes a process of determining the end of the time saving state, and when ending, performing a setting of transmitting a command to that effect to the effect control board 9012 side. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 by the command control processing described above).

  The big hit opening pre-processing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", there is a processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and set the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “probability”. As an example, in response to the big hit type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the maximum winning number is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type corresponds to "probability", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "0.1 seconds", and the number of opening of the special winning opening is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed. By setting "15 times", the short-time open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit opening process in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". . In addition, the big hit open process in step S90115 includes a process of setting a prize ball command indicating that a game ball has been detected by the count switch 9023 to the effect control board 9012 side. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 in the command control processing described above).

  The jackpot opening post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number of times, reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, a process for making settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command is included. When the number of rounds executed has not reached the maximum winning opening maximum number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum number is reached, the special drawing is opened. The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit ending process of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. Includes processing to wait until the time has passed, processing to perform various settings (start setting of probability variation state and time saving state) to start probability variation control and time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state, etc. There is. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is open is set as in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". It is only necessary to set "0.1 seconds" and to set the number of times of opening the special winning opening to "15 times" to set the small hitting game state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

  The small hitting open process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the special winning opening solenoid 9082 may be executed.

  The small hit ending process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". In the small hitting end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, and the like. It includes the process of waiting until the time elapses. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag are not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 32 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S90231). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, in the process of step S90231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 90102 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special figure reservation storages other than "0" is determined in step S90231 (step S90231; No), the reservation stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and a random number value MR2′ for determining the jackpot type are read out as data (step S90232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updated, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1' to MR3' stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 90151B are higher by one entry. Shift to (step S90233). In addition, in the processing of step S90233, the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter in the RAM 90102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S90235). The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. For example, in the process of step S90235, the first pending storage number count value stored in the first pending storage number counter may be read from the RAM 90102, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

  The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls have entered (passed) and the starting prize has been generated. In this case, a table is provided to store data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only needs to be decided.

  In step S90235, when the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" (step S90235; No), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A corresponding to the reservation number "1" is held. As the data, numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type are read out (step S90236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updated, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1' and MR2' stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 90151A are set higher by one entry. It shifts (step S90237). Further, in the process of step S90237, the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter in the RAM 90102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

  After performing any of the processing of steps S90234, S90238, as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit" or "miss" The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S90239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 90130A shown in FIG. 36A is set in the usage table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 90130B shown in FIG. 36B is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 90103 may select the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state.

  The first special symbol display result determination table 90130A is a variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1' for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state Is a table that is referred to in order to make a decision. The second special symbol display result determination table 90130B is the variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1' for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state Is a table that is referred to in order to make a decision.

  In the first special map display result determination table 90130A, the special map is displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). A numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR1′ for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the special state display result determination disorder depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (low certainty state) or the probability variation state (high certainty state). The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1' is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

  In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the table data indicating the decision value to be compared with the random value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result is the special figure display result “ It is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state as "big hit". In each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the game state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More decision values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit" than when. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the special figure display result is set as “big hit” as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). The probability of being determined to control the state increases. In other words, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probable change state, compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is high.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the determined value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, when the variable display result is determined based on that the first start condition for starting the special drawing game using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied, In the case where the variable display result is determined based on the satisfaction of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, the special figure display result is displayed. The proportion determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state as "small hit" can be made different.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a certain variation In the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B, such as the state (high-accurate high-base state), frequent occurrence of the small hitting game state where it is difficult to obtain the winning ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B as well, a determined value within a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". Good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a smaller determination value than that in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, when the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability changing state is lower than the low base state such as the normal state or the probability changing state without the time saving, the proportion determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state is lower. Good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result determination table may be referenced to determine the special figure display result.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90239 shown in FIG. 35, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1′ for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to “big hit”, “small hit”, or “miss”. By comparing with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit" or "miss" (step S90240).

  In step S90239, since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state is selected, in the process of step S90240, the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a certain change state. Whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" is determined by using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A or the second special figure display result determination table 90130B is The table data corresponding to the normal state or the time saving state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1′ is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probability change state, the game state in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A or the second special figure display result determination table 90130B is The table data corresponding to the case of the probability variation state is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1′ is determined with reference to this.

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S90240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit” (step S90241). Then, when it is determined that the "big hit" (step S90241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 37 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (step S90243).

  The jackpot type determination table 90131 determines the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2′ for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the jackpot game state is controlled. This is a table that is referred to in order to do this. In the jackpot type determination table 90131, the special symbol variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A) or the second special symbol (second symbol). The numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type is “non-probable variation”, “probable variation”, or “probability” depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 904B). It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 90131, the assignment of the determined value to the jackpot type of “probability” differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, the determined special value (value in the range of “82” to “99”) is assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”, while the fluctuation special map is Is a second special map, the determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied. And when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied With, it is possible to make different the ratio of determining the jackpot type “probably”. Particularly, in the special drawing game using the second special drawing, since it is not decided that the big hit type is set to "probability" and the short hit open big hit state is controlled, for example, by the high open control accompanying the time saving control, the normal variable winning ball device is provided. In the game state where the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by 906B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of short-term open big hit state where it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

  Even when the variation special map is the second special figure, a determined value in a predetermined range different from that when the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”. Good. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that in the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type “probability”. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

  By referring to the jackpot type determination table 90131 set in step S90243 shown in FIG. Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each of the “probability change” and “probability” jackpot types, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step S90244).

  By determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S90244, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is ended, which is one of the shortened state and the probability variation state which is more advantageous to the player than the shortened state. Whether or not to control is determined before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (step S90245), the decided jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the big hit type is "non-probable change", the big hit type buffer value may be "0", if it is "probable change", it may be "1", and if it is "probable", it may be "2".

  When it is determined in step S90241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S90241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S90246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S90246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90247).

  If it is determined in step S90246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S90246; No), after performing any of the processing of steps S90245 and S90247, whether to control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state Predetermination result of whether or not, further, corresponding to the determination result of the big hit type in the case of a big hit gaming state, set a fixed special symbol (step S90248). As an example, when it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, the special symbol display result becomes a “miss”, which corresponds to a pre-determined result, and becomes a lost symbol. The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is "small hit", the small hit is made in correspondence with the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "small hit". The special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" in step S90241, the big hit symbols "3", "5", and "7" according to the big hit type determination result in step S90244. "One of the special symbols indicating the number" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol showing the number “3” which is the normal jackpot symbol among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "probable variation", a special symbol showing the number "7" which is a probable variation jackpot symbol of the normally open round jackpot symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol. According to the result of the determination that the jackpot type is "actual", the special symbol indicating the number "5" which is the short-term open jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After setting the confirmed special symbol in step S90248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and the special symbol normal process is ended. .. In step S90235, if the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" (step S90235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (step S90250), the special symbol Normal processing ends. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 905 is controlled from the main board 9011. It is determined whether it has been transmitted to the board 9012. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90111 of FIG. 32 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the jackpot flag is on (step S90261; Yes), the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 39(A) is selected as a use table for determining one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. It is set (step S90262). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the RAM 90102, it is specified whether the big hit type is "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probability" (step S90263).

  When it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A determines the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type, and the random value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types based on the table. In the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A, a numerical value (3) that is compared with the random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern depending on whether the big hit type determination result is “indeterminate change”, “probable change”, or “probability”. (Determined value) is a fluctuation pattern PA4'-1, fluctuation pattern PB4'-1, fluctuation pattern PB4'-2, fluctuation pattern PB5'-1 to fluctuation pattern PB5'-4, and fluctuation pattern PC1'-1 to fluctuation pattern It is assigned to any of PC1'-2.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern such that the proportion determined by each variation pattern is different depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot is determined. .. For example, the variation pattern PA4'-1, variation pattern PB4'-1, variation pattern PB4'-2, and variation pattern PB5'-1 to 1, depending on whether the jackpot type is "indeterminate variation" or "probability variation". The determination values are assigned differently to the variation pattern PB5′-4. As a result, it is possible to change the proportion of the same variation pattern determined according to the determination result of which of the plurality of types of big hits.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation patterns according to which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation” or “probable variation”, the variation pattern PA4′-1, variation pattern PB4′-1, variation pattern PB4′-2 and variation pattern PB5′-1 to variation pattern PB5. While the determined value is assigned to'-4, the determined value is not assigned to the variation patterns PC1'-1 to PC1'-2. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable”, the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-2, while the variation pattern PA4′-1, No determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PB4′-1, variation pattern PB4′-2, and variation pattern PB5′-1 to variation pattern PB5′-4. As a result, when the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", the short-term open big hit state is controlled to a different variation pattern from that of the normal open big hit state. be able to.

  When the jackpot type is determined to be “non-probable variation”, “probable variation”, or “probability”, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the probable variation state, or the time saving state. Therefore, the determination value may be assigned differently to each variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to change the rate of determining the same variation pattern depending on which of a plurality of types the gaming state is. Further, when the jackpot type is determined to be either “non-probable variation”, “probable variation”, or “probability”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the probable variation state, or the time saving state. Thus, the determined value may be assigned to different variation patterns. As a result, different variation patterns can be determined according to which of the plurality of types the gaming state is. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, more decision values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4′-1 indicating the normal reach variation pattern than when it is “probable variation”. There is. Therefore, when the reach effect of super reach is executed, the jackpot type is more likely to be a “probable change” than a “non-probable change”, which makes it possible for the player to hold expectations. The interest can be improved. Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 39(A), a larger number of decision values are assigned to the variation pattern for performing the reach effect of super reach B than to the variation pattern for performing the reach effect of super reach A. ing.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S90261 shown in FIG. 38 (step S90261; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S90264). If the small hit flag is on (step S90264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B shown in FIG. 39B is selected as the use table for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns. And set (step S90265).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S90264 (step S90264; No), the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C shown in FIG. 39C is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns. It is selected and set (step S90267). For example, by determining whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 90102 is on or not, it is specified whether the gaming state is in the time saving control in which the time saving control is performed in the probability changing state or the time saving state (step S90268). ).

  The loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “loss”, determines the variation pattern among a plurality of types based on the random value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, the determined values are varied so that the rate determined by each variation pattern is different depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the time-saving control is performed in the probability variation state or the time-saving state. There is a part assigned to the pattern. As a result, the rate of determination of the same variation pattern can be made different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time variation control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state. In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, there is a portion where determination values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time variation control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state. As a result, different variation patterns can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the probability variation state or the time saving control in the time saving state. Note that in the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, in contrast to the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A in FIG. Values are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. Therefore, when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, in contrast to the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A of FIG. Decision values are assigned so that there are fewer patterns. Therefore, the super-reach B has a higher expectation of a big hit when the reach effect is executed than the super-reach A. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention also to the type of reach effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  After performing any of the processing of steps S90263, S90265, and S90268 shown in FIG. By referring to the variation pattern determination table set in the table, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90269). Here, in the process of step S90269, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is determined based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition. Whether or not to determine the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B based on the satisfaction of the second start condition, By using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3′ for determining the fluctuation pattern, which is updated by the common random counter or the like, the common processing module can determine the fluctuation pattern into any of a plurality of types.

  When the big hit flag is on, the table data corresponding to the big hit type specified by the process of step S90263 is selected from the table data forming the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 90132A, and the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is selected. It is only necessary to be able to determine the fluctuation pattern to which the decision value corresponding to the numerical data indicating'is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine one of the variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result that the special figure display result is “big hit”.

  When the small hit flag is on, it is sufficient to refer to the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B and determine the variation pattern to which the determined value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number value MR3' is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine a variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result that the special figure display result is “small hit”.

  When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, by determining the variation pattern in the process of step S90269, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach". That is, the process of step S90269 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “miss”.

  After the variation pattern is determined in step S90269, the special figure variation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S90270). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. Is.

  After executing the process of step S90270, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B according to the variable special figure designation buffer value. The setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special figure games using the figure (step S90271). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 904B is performed.

  Following the processing of step S90271, settings are made for transmitting various commands that are used when the special symbols start changing (step S90272). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 causes the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 to enter a game state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 90101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is transmitted to the RAM 90102. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 causes the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 to enter a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

  Here, the first fluctuation start command is a command that specifies fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. The second fluctuation start command is a command that specifies fluctuation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. The gaming state designation command is a command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Based on the command transmission setting in step S90272, each time a predetermined command control process is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 9011 sends a game state designation command to the effect control board 9012, the first command. The fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command. The game state designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S90273), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing executed in step S90113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special symbol finalized display flag provided in the RAM 90102 is on (step S90291). Here, the special figure confirmed display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S90295, which will be described later, in response to the definite display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game.

  In step S90291, when the special figure finalized display flag is off (step S90291; No), setting for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol is performed (step S90292). At this time, the setting for transmitting the decorative pattern stop command to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90293). Further, a predetermined constant time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S90294). For example, in the process of step S90294, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the special figure fixed display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 90102. Then, the special symbol finalized display flag is set to the on state (step S90295), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. Thus, after the definite special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S90292, until the special symbol definite display time set in step S90294 elapses, the special symbol process processing in accordance with the occurrence of the timer interrupt is a special symbol. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S90291 that the special figure finalized display flag is on.

  When the special figure finalization display flag is on in step S90291 (step S90291; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure finalization display time has elapsed (step S90296). For example, in the process of step S90296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer whose timer initial value has been set by the process of step S90294 is read, and whether or not the timer value becomes "0" Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. The game control process timer value is updated so that if the timer value is a value other than “0”, it is decremented by 1 each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Good. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; No), the special symbol stop processing is ended, and the process waits until the special figure confirmation display time elapses.

  When the special figure finalization display time has elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; Yes), after the special figure finalization display flag is cleared and turned off (step S90297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. A determination is made (step S90298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S90298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the big hit start effect waiting time (step S90299). Also, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90300). For example, in the process of step S90300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area designated by the pointer.

  Following the processing of step S90300, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step S90301). Also, settings are made to end the probability variation state and the time saving state (step S90302). For example, as the process of step S90302, a process of clearing the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to turn them off, a process of clearing a time saving counter for counting the remaining number of special figure games executed during high base, etc. Should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S90303), the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S90298 (step S90298; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S90304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S90304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the small hit start effect waiting time (step S90305). Then, the main board 9011 is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 9012 from the main board 9011 in response to the fact that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S90306). After that, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S90307). Further, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S90308).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S90304 (step S90304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0" (step S90309). After performing either of the processes of steps S90308 and S90309, it is determined whether to end the time saving control and the high opening control in the high base (step S90311), and to end (step S90311; Yes), while terminating the time saving control and the high opening control, etc., and performing the setting to transmit the time saving ending command indicating the end of the time saving state (step S90312), the special symbol stop processing is ended. On the other hand, when not ending (step S90311; No), the special symbol stop processing is ended as it is. For example, in the process of step S90311, when the time saving flag is ON, the time saving count value stored in the time saving counter is updated by, for example, subtracting 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated time saving count value matches a predetermined time saving end determination value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, the time saving control or the high opening control in the high base may be ended by clearing the time saving flag to turn it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, the state of the time saving flag may be maintained and the special symbol stop processing may be ended. Even when the gaming state is the probability change state, if the time saving flag is on, it may be determined whether or not to end the time saving control, and the time saving control may be ended based on the result of the determination. While the time saving control is ended in this manner, the probability variation control may be continued until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" next time, or until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times. As a result, the gaming state can be in the latent probability changing state. For the probability variation state in which the time saving flag is ON and the probability variation flag is ON, the time saving control is continuously performed until the next variable display result is "big hit".

  In the process of step S90311, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for the probability variation control end determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, and the probability variation control end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90101 or the like is referred to. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation control, for example, when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S90311, the process for terminating the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the variable display result becomes “big hit” next time.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 41. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 shown in FIG. 41 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071) to clear the RAM 90122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 9012. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9072; No), it stands by.

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I/O 90125, a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 receives a control signal to be a production control command. Take in. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 90122, for example. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S9073), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S9074, it is determined whether or not an abnormal command is received from the main board 9011 side (step S9075). The abnormal command relates to winning such as making a player think that he/she has won a prize even if he/she has not actually won the prize (more specifically, a prize for a variable winning device that has not been actually opened has been detected). This command is sent when at least one of a plurality of abnormalities such as an abnormality (winning abnormality) or an abnormality caused by the upper plate or the lower plate being filled with game balls (abnormal dish) is detected. As the abnormal command, a command corresponding to each of a plurality of abnormalities is transmitted from the main board 9011 side. When it is determined that the abnormality command is received (step S9075; Yes), abnormality notification processing is executed to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred (step S9076). In the abnormality notification process, for example, a process of displaying a message indicating which type of abnormality has occurred on the image display device, lighting a lamp, or outputting a sound may be performed. Although described in detail later, in this embodiment, the process of step S9076 enables the abnormality notification to be executed at any timing by receiving the abnormality command, and the icon as the specific display is displayed. The abnormality can be notified within a predetermined period after the notification that the abnormality has occurred.

  After executing the process of step S9076 or when determining that the abnormal command has not been received in step S9075 (step S9075; No), it is determined whether or not the player has performed the effect setting (step S9077). .. In the process of step S9077, for example, it is determined whether or not a player has operated an effect setting button (not shown) by checking whether or not a sensor for detecting an operation act of the player has been detected. When it is determined that the effect setting has been performed (step S9077; Yes), effect setting processing is performed (step S9078). In the process of step S9078, since the effect setting button is operated by the player, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the type of music or background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 905, and the game effect lamp. It suffices to change the effect-related settings such as the brightness settings of various lamps such as 909. Note that, for example, which effect setting to change may be selectable from the menu screen, or a different operation may be performed in accordance with a change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do it. As will be described later in detail, in this embodiment, by the processing of step S9078, the setting related to the effect can be executed at any timing due to the operation by the player, and the specific display is performed. Even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, it is possible to set the effect. Specifically, the process of step S9078 can be executed at any timing, such as during demo display, during variable display, during big hit game control. Note that the process of step S9078 may be disabled during the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (for example, 0.1 seconds). Specifically, the process of step S9078 may be prohibited during the period from the reception of the symbol determination command to the reception of the fluctuation start command.

  After executing the process of step S9078, or when it is determined that the effect setting is not performed in step S9077 (step S9077; No), the effect control process process is executed (step S9079). In the effect control process processing of step S9079, for example, a display operation of an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, a sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation in a decorative light-emitting body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, With respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, such as the drive operation in the production model, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the production control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011.

  Following the effect control process processing, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S9080), and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 are generated by software as various random number values used for effect control. Update. Then, the process returns to step S9072.

  42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing performed in step S9079 of FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122 or the like. To do.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the like from the main board 9011 is received, and whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 905. It includes a process for determining.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. In order to perform variable display execution settings and other various staging operations, it includes processing to determine fixed decorative symbols and various staging control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result. .. In addition, in the variable display start setting process, depending on the degree of advantage, a special display effect such as a special image such as an icon is displayed step by step, and an advantageous state such as cut-in notice or step-up notice. Execution setting of a notice effect as an effect suggesting that control is performed is performed. Note that the degree of advantage to the player is, for example, a state that is actually advantageous to the player when a certain event occurs (a state where a privilege is given, or a state where a privilege is given, or a state where the rate of giving a privilege is high). , The ratio of being in an advantageous state different from the privilege, or the ratio of being in an advantageous state. In addition, the privilege that is shown to be highly likely to be given by the special mode may be the same as the object of the advantage to the player (advantageous state), and is different from the object of the advantage to the player. It may be one. Further, the specific display effect in this embodiment indicates that a special image such as an icon as the specific display is an effect that is displayed stepwise according to the degree of advantage. It may be a display corresponding to (active display) or a meter display, and it can be used in various types of production, such as changing the display mode of the active display stepwise or increasing the meter display stepwise. You can That is, the concept of gradual change of the specific display is that a special image such as an icon is displayed in a stepwise manner, the mode of the active display is changed in a stepwise manner, and the meter display is increased (or decreased). For example.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 90120 reads out various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 90122, and various values during variable display of the decorative pattern. Effect control. Further, in the variable display effect production process, a specific display effect and a notice effect are executed. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Corresponding to, etc., the fixed decorative design as the final stopped design resulting in the variable display result of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the special figure variation effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command When the time has elapsed, the variable display result can be confirmed by autonomously deriving and displaying the fixed decorative design on the side of the effect control board 9012 without depending on the effect control command from the main board 9011. When the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The special figure winning waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the winning start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit medium effect processing. To update. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing in the small hit. Is updated to "4". When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0". In addition, in the special figure hit waiting processing of step S90173, when the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state except for "probability", the above-mentioned big hit middle promotion effect execution processing is included. ing.

  The effect process during small hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. The game effect lamp 909 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control in the small hitting game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED for decoration is executed. Further, in the small hit medium effect process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 9011, for example. ..

  The small hit completion production process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit completion effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the display screen of the image display device 905. The game effect lamp 909 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control at the end of the small hitting game state such as turning on/off/blinking the decoration LED is executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

  The big hit mid-big hit production process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this big hit medium effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 9014, the game effect lamp 909 or decoration Various effect control in the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED for use is executed. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, control for executing the big hit midpoint promotion effect and notification effect is performed. In the big hit mid-game production process, the value of the production control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011, for example.

  The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and causes an effect image based on the setting contents to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. By outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014, a game effect lamp 909 or for decoration Various effect control at the end of the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED is executed.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90171 of FIG. 42 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the special figure display result as “missing” by, for example, reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011. It is determined whether or not (step S90551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “miss” (step S90551; Yes), the specified fluctuation pattern is read by, for example, reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 9011. Is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is determined (step S90552).

  When it is determined in step S90552 that it is a non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which are the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination is determined (step S90553). As an example, in the process of step S90553, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left confirmed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined left confirmed stored in the ROM 90121 or the like is determined. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the left confirmed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 among the confirmed decorative symbols is determined. Next, the numerical data showing the random number value for the right fixed symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and the predetermined right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thereby, the right fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 among the fixed decorative patterns is determined. At this time, it may be determined such that the design number of the right fixed decorative design is different from the design number of the left fixed decorative design by the setting in the right fixed design determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium fixed symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and the predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thus, the final fixed decorative design is determined to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 among the fixed decorative designs.

  When it is determined in step S90552 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; No), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol forming the reach combination is determined (step S90554). As an example, in the process of step S90554, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left/right fixed symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, is extracted, and a predetermined left/right determined in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is determined. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in the display region of the image display device 905 among the fixed decorative symbols are the same. Determine the decorative pattern of. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-decision symbol determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, and by referring to a predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. Of the fixed decorative patterns, the medium fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, when the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, for example, when the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value is set. (For example, "1") may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design so that the fixed decorative design does not become a big hit combination but becomes a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, a difference (design difference) between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design is determined, and a medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the determined difference may be set. ..

  When it is determined in step S90551 that the special figure display result is not "miss" (step S90551; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is "small hit" or "probability" (step S90555). ). When it is determined that the "small hit" or "probability" (step S90555; Yes), for example, the opening chance, for example, of the fixed decorative pattern which is the final stop design corresponding to the "small hit" or "probability" The combination is determined (step S90557). As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, a final stop symbol that constitutes any one of a plurality of types of opening chances and Determine the combination of confirmed decorative patterns. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for chance chance determination that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thus, it is only necessary to determine the combination of the fixed decorative patterns that form any of the opening chance eyes.

  When it is determined in step S525 that the "non-probable variation" or the "probable variation" other than the "small hit" (step S90555; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S90556). As an example, in the process of step S90556, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random counter of the RAM 90122 is extracted, and subsequently, a predetermined jackpot confirmed symbol stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the determination table or the like, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the screen of the image display device 905 are the same. Determine the decorative design.

  As a specific example, regardless of whether the jackpot type is “non-probable variation” or “probable variation”, in the process of step S90556, one of the decorative symbols is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols. It suffices to select and determine the fixed decorative pattern that constitutes the big hit combination.

  After performing any one of step S90553, step S90554, step S90556, and step S90557, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the execution of the specific display effect in which the special image such as the icon is displayed stepwise according to the degree of advantage. Specific display effect execution setting processing for performing is performed (step S90559).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific display effect execution setting process performed in step S90559 of FIG. In the specific display effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the specific display effect (step S90601). Specifically, in the process of step S90601, the presence/absence of execution of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the specific display effect execution determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a specific display effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the specific display effect is set to the illustrated determination ratio according to the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set such that the ratio of the variable display result being a “big hit” is higher when the specific display effect is executed than when the specific display effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the specific display effect is executed. Note that, for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate is different depending on whether it is a super-reach big hit or a normal reach big hit. If the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determined proportion may be changed according to the variation pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 44, after executing the process of step S90601, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the specific display effect in step S90601 (step S90602). When it is determined not to execute the specific display effect (step S90602; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the specific display effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the specific display effect (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution mode of the specific display effect (step S90603). Specifically, in the process of step S90603, the execution mode of the specific display effect is determined to be one of a plurality of modes with reference to the specific display effect execution mode determination table shown in FIG. 45(B).

  FIG. 45(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the specific display effect execution mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in this embodiment, the types of specific display effects such as “pattern A”, “pattern B”, and “pattern C” are set, and the variable display result is set. Accordingly, the determined proportion is set. Specifically, the mode of "pattern A" is a mode in which a star icon is displayed, and the mode of "pattern B" is a mode in which a star icon and a triangular icon are displayed. The mode “C” is a mode in which a star icon, a triangular icon, and a round icon are displayed. In the specific display effect execution mode determination table in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the mode of "pattern B" is more preferable than the mode of "pattern A" is the mode of "pattern C" than the mode of "pattern B". , The determined proportion is set so that the variable display result will be a “big hit” when it is executed (that is, the proportion of more icons displayed is a “big hit”) Is set to be high). Therefore, the development destination differs depending on which icon is displayed, and the player can pay attention to which icon is displayed. In addition, in the illustrated example, three types of modes of “pattern A” to “pattern C” are shown, but a mode in which only a triangular icon is displayed or a mode in which only a round icon is displayed may be used. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of executions of the specific display effect is one (only whether or not to execute the specific display effect is determined in step S90601 of FIG. 44), but the specific display effect is executed multiple times. It may be performed (the higher the number of times of execution, the higher the proportion of “big hit”), and in that case, one type of icon may be displayed each time it is executed (see FIG. 44). The number of times of execution may be determined in step S90601, and an aspect corresponding to the variation pattern and the number of times may be determined in the process of step S90603). Further, even if the number of displayed icons is the same, the proportion of "big hits" may be different depending on the combination of displayed icons (that is, the icons to be displayed according to the variable display result). Combinations may be determined in different proportions).

  Returning to FIG. 44, after executing the process of step S90603, the effect control CPU 90120 does not perform the pseudo-continuous change and only changes the pseudo continuous gaze effect (PB3′-1, PB3 shown in FIG. 30. '-2, PB5'-1, PB5'-2) is determined by checking the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 side (step S90604). If it is determined that the variation pattern is not the pseudo continuous variation (step S90604; No), that is, if the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation or is not the pseudo continuous variation pattern, the execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 1, the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined (step S90605), and the specific display effect execution setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is the pseudo continuous gaze (step S90604; Yes), the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined by referring to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 46B (step S90606). The specific display effect execution setting process ends. As described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, it is assumed that a maximum of one pseudo-repeated change is performed (one re-change), but the variable display effect of “pseudo-repeated” is used. The number of times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation may be set to be able to be executed more than once, for example, twice or three times. In that case, in step S90604 of FIG. If it is determined whether or not the effect is performed, and if the failure effect is executed, the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the specific display effect. Good (the execution timing may be determined by referring to the execution timing determination table in which the timing to be superimposed is not selectable).

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the specific display effect. FIG. 46(A) shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table 1 that is referred to when the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation or is not a pseudo continuous variation pattern, and FIG. , A configuration example of the execution timing determination table 2 that is referred to in the case of the pseudo continuous gaze variation pattern is shown. In the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 46(A), three types of timings such as "timing 1" to "timing 3" are set as the determination timings, and the determination rates shown in the figure are set. Note that "timing 1" to "timing 3" shown in FIG. 46(A) are execution timings that are preset according to the variation pattern, and even if the execution timings of the same "timing 2" are varied, The timing is different for each pattern. All the execution timings of "timing 1" to "timing 3" may be different timings according to the variation pattern, or, for example, the execution timing of "timing 1" may be the common execution timing regardless of the variation pattern. Good. On the other hand, in the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 46(B), two types of timings such as “timing 1” and “timing 3” are set as the determination timings, and the determination rates shown in the figure are set. .. As will be described later in detail, the execution timing of "timing 2" is set to the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed, and the other "timing 1" and "timing 1" The execution timing of "timing 3" is set to an execution timing in which the execution period of the pseudo-interconnection effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap with each other (see FIG. 48). In the illustrated example, three types of timings “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in the respective execution timing determination tables. ..

  Here, the specific display effect and its execution timing will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing details of the specific display effect. As shown in FIG. 47, when the specific display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect that indicates whether or not to display the icon as the specific display (see FIGS. 54B to 54E), and is specified when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success. The specific display change notification for notifying that the icon as the display is displayed is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S90603 of FIG. (Specific display changes). Then, the specific display effect ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the specific display is changed. However, the specific display change notification is continuously performed for the predetermined period of 10 seconds described above. It may not be performed, for example, may be continuously performed for 6 seconds, and the specific display change notification may not be performed for the remaining 4 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the execution of the failure effect or the notice effect is limited for a predetermined period after being notified that the icon is displayed, but the specific display change notification is continuously executed for the predetermined period. As described above, the time period may be a production time period or a time period counted by a timer such as 10 seconds. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 47, a case where the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success (in the present embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the effect result of the predetermined effect always indicates success is described. However, in this case, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed), and if the specific display effect is finished as it is. Good. The process of step S90601 in FIG. 44 determines whether or not to execute such a specific display effect. In the case where the production result of the predetermined effect also includes failure, the mode of executing the predetermined effect indicating failure may be selectable in the process of step S90603 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the specific display effect. FIG. 48(A) shows the execution timing of the specific display effect in the case of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous gas, and FIG. 48(B) shows the case of the variation pattern other than the pseudo continuous gas, in which the pseudo continuous variation is The execution timing of the specific display effect at the time of the variation pattern to be performed is shown. FIG. 48C shows a case of a variation pattern other than the pseudo continuous gaze, and specifically shows the execution timing of the specific display effect in the case of the variation pattern of non-reach loss. In the illustrated example, the non-reach-miss variation pattern is shown, and the other variation patterns are omitted, but in the case of other variation patterns, as described above, for each variation pattern, "Timing 1" to "timing 3" are preset. As shown in FIG. 48(A), in the case of the variation pattern of pseudo continuous gaze, the pseudo continuous attraction effect to be executed is a failure effect. As described above, in the specific display effect, after the result indicating success is displayed as the effect result of the predetermined effect, the specific display change notification for notifying that the icon as the specific display is displayed continues for a predetermined period. It is suggested that it will be advantageous to the player. Nevertheless, if a failure production is subsequently performed as a pseudo-enhancement production, the player will be discouraged and the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the case of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous gaze, the execution timing of the specific display effect is the execution of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are overlapped. Timing is not selectable. Therefore, in the process of step S90606 of FIG. 44, the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 46B, in which the execution timing of “timing 2” is not determined. is doing. As a result, the execution of the failure effect is restricted in a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is notified, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is prevented. When determining the execution timing when the specific display effect is executed a plurality of times with the pseudo continuous gaze variation pattern, a plurality of timings are selected from the execution timings other than “timing 2” in the process of step S90606 of FIG. do it. Further, when the result of the predetermined effect in the specific display effect indicates failure, the execution timing of "timing 2" may be selectable because the above situation does not occur (FIG. 48B described later). same as). On the other hand, even when the result of the predetermined effect in the specific display effect indicates failure, the execution timing of "timing 2" is not selectable, and it is notified that the icon is not displayed (the predetermined effect as the mini game. It may be possible to prevent the failure effect from being performed in a predetermined period after the result of (1) ends in failure). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged due to the failure of the result of the predetermined effect and the execution of the failure effect. In addition, in this embodiment, it is informed that the icon for the specific display is displayed by making it impossible to select the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous production (failure production) and the execution period of the specific display production are unselectable. Although an example is shown in which the execution of the failure effect is prohibited in a predetermined period after that, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-interaction effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the specific display effect are superposed may be selectable. In that case, the failure effect may be executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as a display smaller than that in the normal time or a transparent display. Further, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the specific display effect are overlapped is not made non-selectable, but is determined, for example, by a determination ratio of 1% or 2%. The ratio may be limited by making it extremely low compared to the case where the failure effect is not performed. That is, the restriction on the execution of the failure effect includes not only the case where it is not executed but also the case where it is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the case where it is executed at an extremely low rate. In addition, the execution timing of "timing 2" in which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed can be selected, and when "timing 2" is determined, "timing 2" and "timing 2" are selected. By performing a process of shifting the execution timing of the specific display effect at a timing such as "timing 2.5" which is the execution timing between "timing 3", the pseudo after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed It may be possible to restrict the failure production as the continuous production.

  Further, for example, when the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined to be "timing 1" as shown in FIG. 48(A), the failure effect is subsequently performed as the pseudo-interconnection effect after a certain period has elapsed. Therefore, the discouragement of the player can be alleviated to some extent. However, in order to prevent the player from becoming more discouraged, in the case of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous gas, “timing 1” and “timing 2” cannot be selected, that is, before the execution period of the pseudo continuous production. The set timing may not be selectable (the failure presentation is limited during the period after the icon as the specific display is displayed). According to this, since the execution of the failure effect is limited after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is notified, it is possible to further prevent the amusement of the game from being deteriorated. It should be noted that while "timing 2" is not selectable, the determination rate for determining "timing 1" may be 1% or 2%, or an extremely low determination rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48(B), in the case of a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation is performed, the pseudo continuous production is a successful production. Therefore, the event that the player is discouraged by executing the failure effect after the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period and suggesting that it is advantageous for the player does not occur. Therefore, as shown in the figure, as the execution timing of the specific display effect, the execution timing of "timing 2" in which the execution period of the pseudo-interconnection effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed can be selected. That is, in the process of step S90605 of FIG. 44, the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 46A including the execution timing of “timing 2”. Further, as shown in FIG. 48(C), similarly, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, in the process of step S90605 of FIG. 44, the execution timing of “timing 2” is shown in FIG. 46(A). Although the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined by referring to the execution timing determination table 1, the execution timing of "timing 1" is compared with the case of the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation shown in FIG. 48(B) is performed. Is common timing (for example, timing 2 seconds after the start of variable display), the execution timings of "timing 2" and "timing 3" are different. In this way, by providing the execution timing different from the common execution timing according to the variation pattern, it is possible to enhance the effect. Note that, as shown in FIG. 48C, the specific display effect can be executed even with a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation and a pseudo continuous variation pattern are performed. According to this, in the first place, since the pseudo-interconnection effect is not executed in the predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game. When determining the execution timing when the specific display effect is executed a plurality of times in the variation pattern for performing the pseudo continuous variation (in the variation pattern other than the pseudo continuous variation), in the processing of step S90605 of FIG. It is sufficient to select a plurality of timings from all the execution timings from "to timing 3". Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B (the same applies to a variation pattern that is a reach instead of a pseudo-relation variation pattern), the execution timing of the specific display effect is the timing before the reach. The specific display effect may be executed in the middle. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous fluctuation may be one or more times, one specific display effect may be performed for each fluctuation including the initial fluctuation, and in one fluctuation including the initial fluctuation. The specific display effect may be performed multiple times. In addition, when the specific display effect is performed a plurality of times, the number of icons that are displayed stepwise increases (for example, when the specific display effects are performed three times in total, one icon is displayed in one specific display effect). It may be displayed, and finally, three icons may be displayed, etc.) so that the advantage is high.

  Returning to FIG. 43, after executing the specific display effect execution setting process of step S90559, the effect control CPU 90120 gives advance notice such as a cut-in advance notice or a step-up advance notice giving an advance notice as to whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit”. The notice effect execution setting process for setting the effect execution setting is performed (step S90560).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect execution setting process performed in step S90560 of FIG. In the notice effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the notice effect (step S90901). Specifically, in the process of step S90901, the presence/absence of execution of the notice effect is determined with reference to the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the description and facilitate understanding, a cut-in notice is executed as the notice effect, but other types of notice effects may be executed. Different types of notice effects may be executed according to the variable display result.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the notice effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the notice effect is set to the illustrated determination rate according to the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set such that the ratio of the variable display result of "big hit" is higher when the notice effect is executed than when the notice effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the notice effect is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 49, after executing the process of step S90901, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the notice effect in step S90901 (step S90902). When it is determined that the notice effect is not executed (step S90902; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the notice effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the notice effect (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the execution setting of the particular display effect is performed in the particular display effect execution setting process in step S90560 of FIG. 43. Yes (step S90904). When it is determined that the execution setting of the specific display effect is not made (step S90904; No), the execution timing of the advance notice effect is determined by referring to the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. The setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution setting of the specific display effect is set (step S90904; Yes), any one of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIGS. 51B to 51D. Is referred to according to the execution timing of the specific display effect, and the execution timing of the notice effect is determined. Then, the notice effect execution setting process ends.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the notice effect. FIG. 51A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table A that is referred to when the specific display effect is not executed. In the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. 51(A), four types of timings such as “timing A” to “timing D” are set, and set to the illustrated determination ratio. 51B to 51D show configuration examples of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D that are referred to when the specific display effect is executed. Specifically, the execution timing determination table B is a table that is referred to when the specific display effect is executed at the timing of "timing 1", and the execution timing determination table C is when the specific display effect is "timing 2". The execution timing determination table D is a table that is referred to when it is executed at the timing, and the execution timing determination table D is a table that is referred to when the specific display effect is executed at the timing of "timing 3". In each of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D, the execution timing of the notice effect is set such that the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed cannot be selected (FIG. 52). reference). In the illustrated example, four types of timings, "timing A" to "timing D" are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in the respective execution timing determination tables. .. Further, in the illustrated example, the execution timing is determined irrespective of the variable display result. The execution timing determined according to the result may be different (on the contrary, the earlier the execution timing, the higher the proportion of “big hit” may be). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to the timing at which the notice effect is executed.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 51 shows an example in which each of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D is prepared in advance according to the execution timing of the specific display effect, but FIG. 51(A). From the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. 5, a determination table in which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect cannot be selected is created in the process of step S90906 in FIG. 49, and the execution timing is determined. You can According to this, the capacity can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, execution timings of the specific display effect and the notice effect will be described. FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed. When the specific display effect is not executed, any execution timing may be determined from among all the execution timings such as “timing A” to “timing D” shown in FIG. 51 (see FIG. 51A). Further, the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 52 shows an example in the case where an error occurs at the timing or the player makes an effect setting, and a description thereof will be omitted here. It should be noted that a case where an error occurs at the timing of “X” and a case where an effect setting is performed by the player will be described later. Further, as described above, even when the specific display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed. ), since the specific display effect ends, the execution timing of the notice effect may be determined from all the execution timings such as “timing A” to “timing D”.

  Specifically, FIG. 52A is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 1” in FIG. 46 (see FIG. 48 ). As shown in the figure, when the specific display effect is executed at "timing 1", any timing of "timing B" to "timing D" other than "timing A" is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect (" Timing A" is not selectable). That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the notice effect by referring to the execution timing determination table B shown in FIG. 51B in the process of step S90906 of FIG. In the illustrated example, the execution timing of "timing B" is a timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-interaction effect and the execution period of the notice effect overlap, and "timing B" is also selected as the execution timing of the notice effect. Although it is possible, in this case, the execution timing of “timing B” may not be selectable. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each effect. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 52(A), an example in which a failure effect is executed as the pseudo-interconnection effect is shown, but the same applies to the case where a success effect is executed. Similarly to the case of determining the execution timing of the specific display effect, "timing B" can be selected as the execution timing of the notice effect when executing the success effect, and "timing B" when executing the failure effect. "Cannot be selected (when the timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-interaction effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed is determined as the execution timing, it may be determined in the same manner as in the case of the specific display effect) .

  FIG. 52B is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 2” in FIG. 46 (see FIG. 48 ). As shown in the figure, when the specific display effect is executed at "timing 2", any one of "timing A", "timing C" and "timing D" other than "timing B" is the execution timing of the notice effect. (“Timing B” cannot be selected). That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the notice effect by referring to the execution timing determination table C shown in FIG. 51C in the process of step S90906 of FIG. In the illustrated example, the end timing of the specific display effect and the end timing of the pseudo continuous effect are the same timing, but this is an example and may be different timings.

  FIG. 52C is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 3” in FIG. 46 (see FIG. 48 ). As shown in the figure, when the specific display effect is executed at "timing 3", any one of "timing A", "timing B" and "timing D" other than "timing C" is the execution timing of the notice effect. (“Timing C” cannot be selected). That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the advance notice effect by referring to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIG. 51D in the process of step S90906 of FIG. Note that, as shown in FIG. 52, the execution timing of "timing D" is set as an execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not overlap. That is, the execution timing of the "timing D" is a commonly selectable execution timing regardless of the execution timing of the specific display effect. Therefore, the notice is executed at a common timing regardless of the execution timing of the specific display effect (and even when the specific display effect is not executed), regardless of the execution timing of the specific display effect. There is a case where the effect is executed, and the range of the effect can be expanded.

  As described above, in the specific display effect, after the result indicating success is displayed as the effect result of the predetermined effect, the specific display change notification for notifying that the icon as the specific display is displayed continues for a predetermined period. It is suggested that it will be advantageous to the player. Nevertheless, if the notice effect is executed within the predetermined period from the notification that the icon will be displayed to the display of the icon (the specific display changes), the effect of the specific display effect will decrease. Will end up. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notice effect from being executed within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, and to prevent the effect from decreasing. In this embodiment, the execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect overlap is not selectable, and the predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed Although an example of prohibiting the execution of the notice effect is shown, the execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superposed may be selectable, in which case a display smaller than the normal time or The notice effect may be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as by displaying it transparently. That is, the restriction on the execution of the notice production includes not only the case where it is not executed but also the case where it is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Further, as described above, even when the specific display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed. ), since the specific display effect is finished as it is, the phenomenon that the effect of the specific display effect is lowered does not occur. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to select the execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not selectable (the execution of the notice effect need not be restricted).

  Returning to FIG. 43, after executing the advance notice effect execution setting process of step S90560, the effect control CPU 90120 executes other effects such as an effect that fuels whether or not to reach, or an advance notification of a chance to be performed in the reach state. Whether or not to perform, and other effect settings for determining the type of effect to be executed are set, and an effect control pattern to be used pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90561). The effect control CPU 90120, for example, corresponds to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific display effect or the notice effect determined in steps S90559 and S90560, and is stored in the ROM 90121 in advance. Any one of the effect control patterns may be selected and set as the usage pattern. Subsequently, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S90562).

  Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern in the image display device 905 is performed (step S90563). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S90561 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, the image display device 905 The variation of the decorative design may be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the display area. After executing the process of step S90563, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90564), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To finish.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S90172 of FIG. 42 as the variable display effect process. When the variable display effect production process shown in FIG. 53 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. (Step S90801). CPU90120 for production control updates the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, subtracts 1), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value. First, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90801; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is a specific display effect period for executing the specific display effect (step S90802). ). If the specific display effect period is predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90561 in accordance with the presence/absence of execution of the specific display effect and the timing being determined in the process of step S90559 of FIG. Good.

  When it is determined that it is the specific display effect period (step S90802; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control of the specific display effect (step S90803). As a result, the specific display effect is executed. Specifically, in the process of step S90803, as described above, the predetermined effect as the mini game is performed, and after the success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect, the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is specified. The display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon in the mode determined in step S90603 of FIG. 44 is displayed (the specific display changes). In addition, when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates failure, in the process of step S90803, the specific display change notification may not be performed after the predetermined effect indicating failure is performed (the icon may not be displayed. ).

  After executing the process of step S90803, or when determining in step S90802 that it is not the specific display effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the effect effect period of performing the effect effect. A determination is made (step S90802). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90561 in accordance with the presence/absence of execution of the notice effect and the timing being determined in the process of step S90560 of FIG. When it is determined that the notice production period is reached (step S90804; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the notice control of the notice production (step S90805). As a result, the notice production is executed.

  After performing the process of step S90805, or when determining in step S90804 that it is not the notice effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (step S90806). The reach production period may be predetermined in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern, for example. When it is determined that it is the reach effect period (step S90806; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 performs control for executing the reach effect, such as displaying a background image for the reach effect (step S90807).

  After execution of the process of step S90807, or when it is determined in step S90806 that the reach effect period is not reached (step S90806; No), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. Based on the other control, control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern is performed (step S90808), and the variable display effect process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S90801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol fixing command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S90809; No), the variable display effect production process is ended and stands by.

  When the symbol determination command is received in step S90809 (step S90809; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, for example. In the variable display of the symbols, control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S90810). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the big hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S90811). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S90812), and ends the variable display effect effect process.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the specific display effect and the failure effect as the pseudo-interconnection effect are executed. Specifically, an example of the effect operation when the specific display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 1” shown in FIG. 48(A) and then the pseudo-interaction effect of the failure effect is performed is shown. When the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 54(a), a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a specific display effect is started as shown in FIG. 54(b). In the illustrated example, a mode in which the character appears as the predetermined effect and the success is achieved by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined effect, but the predetermined effect is not limited to this. You can Further, as the effect result of the predetermined effect, there may be an effect indicating failure as described above.

  Then, when the predetermined effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 54(c) to 54(d) and success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 54(e), FIG. As shown, it is notified that the icon is displayed as the specific display change notification (specific display change notification is executed). The specific display change notification is continuously given for a predetermined period. Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed, an icon is displayed as a specific display, as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, the "pattern A" is shown, so that a star icon is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(h), the decorative designs are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative design display areas 905L, 905R, and as shown in FIG. 54(i), “medium”. In the decorative pattern display area 905C, a pseudo continuous production effect is executed to determine whether or not the "re" mark is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pseudo continuous chance pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 54(j), the failure effect is executed as the pseudo continuous attraction effect, and the "re" mark as the pseudo continuous chance symbol is in the reach state without the temporary stop display. Although the illustrated example shows an example in which the reach state is set after the pseudo continuous production (failure production), the reach state may not be set after the failure production. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54(j), the display position of the icon display as the specific display is moved, but the display position may not be moved. At this time, the display priority may or may not be given priority to the icon display.

  In this way, when the failure effect is executed as the pseudo-enhancement effect, the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the specific display effect. The execution period of and the execution period of failure production do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's discouragement due to the failure effect being performed after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (changed), and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment level of the game. It should be noted that instead of setting the execution period of the failure effect and the timing at which the execution period do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect, the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period do not overlap may be set as the execution timing of the failure effect. .. That is, instead of adjusting the execution timing of the specific display effect, the execution timing of the failure effect may be adjusted. Specifically, one execution timing of the failure effect may be selected from a plurality of timings set in advance so that the execution period of the specific effect and the execution period of the failure effect do not overlap each other.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the specific display effect and the success effect as the pseudo-interconnection effect are executed. Specifically, an example of the effect operation when the specific display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 2” shown in FIG. 48(B) and a pseudo effect of success effect effect is shown. Note that FIGS. 55(a) to 55(f) are the same as those in FIGS. 54(a) to 54(f), and thus description thereof will be omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 55, since the success effect is performed as the pseudo-interaction effect, the pseudo-interaction effect is also executed after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55(g), the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L and 905R, and as shown in FIG. 55(h), “middle” A pseudo continuous production effect is executed to determine whether or not the "re" mark is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pseudo continuous chance pattern in the decorative pattern display area 905C. Then, as shown in FIG. 55(i), a success effect is executed as the pseudo-relationship effect, and the "re" mark as the pseudo-relationship symbol is temporarily displayed. Then, when the change is performed again and a predetermined period of time has passed, an icon is displayed as a specific display as shown in FIG. 55(j). Although the illustrated example shows an example in which the icon as the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed during the re-change, the lapse timing of the predetermined period (that is, the timing of the specific display change) is earlier. May be Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55(h), a predetermined period may elapse during execution of the pseudo-interaction effect, and the icon display as the specific display may be performed. In addition, when the success effect is performed as the pseudo-interaction effect and the specific display effect is performed, the lapse timing of the predetermined period may be set to the same timing as the end timing of the pseudo-interaction effect. In addition, the end timing of the pseudo continuous effect and the elapse timing of the predetermined period may be independently determined. In this way, when the successful effect is executed as the pseudo-interaction effect, the situation in which the player is not discouraged does not occur, so the timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-interaction effect and the execution period of the specific display effect overlap Can be determined as the execution timing of the specific effect.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the specific display effect and the notice effect are executed. Specifically, an example of the effect operation in the case where the specific display effect is performed at the execution timing of "timing 1" shown in FIG. 52(A) and the notice effect is subsequently performed at the execution timing of "timing B" is shown. ing. Note that the example shown in FIG. 52A shows an example in which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the pseudo-interaction effect overlap, but in the example shown in FIG. 56, in order to facilitate understanding, An example of the effect operation of the pseudo continuous effect is omitted.

  When the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 56(a), a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a specific display effect is started as shown in FIG. 56(b). In the illustrated example, a mode in which the character appears as the predetermined effect and the success is achieved by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined effect, but the predetermined effect is not limited to this. You can Further, as the effect result of the predetermined effect, there may be an effect indicating failure as described above. Then, when the predetermined effect proceeds as shown in FIGS. 56(c) to 56(d) and success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 56(e), FIG. As shown, it is notified that the icon is displayed as the specific display change notification (specific display change notification is executed). The specific display change notification is continuously given for a predetermined period. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period, an icon is displayed as a specific display as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, the "pattern A" is shown, so that a star icon is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(h), a cut-in notice is given as a notice effect. In addition to the illustrated example, a different form of cut-in notice may be executed depending on the proportion of the "big hit". In addition to the cut-in notice, a step-up notice or a battle effect may be given. You can

  In this manner, when the specific display effect is executed, the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect, so the execution period of the specific display effect and the notice The performance execution period does not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the notice production being performed in a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (changed). ..

  FIG. 57 shows an example of the effect operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. Specifically, from the side of the main board 9011, an abnormal command indicating that the winning of the variable winning device which is not actually opened is detected (winning error) is indicated by the timing (X) shown in FIG. An example in the case of receiving at the timing after the specific display change notification in the specific display effect) is shown. As shown in FIG. 57(a), if the abnormal command is received at the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 52 after the specific display change notification is given, it is determined that the abnormal command is received in step S9075 shown in FIG. The determination is made, and the abnormality notification processing is performed in the processing of step S9076. Then, as a result of the processing, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the abnormality notification is performed in a manner according to the type of the abnormal command received (in the example shown, an example of displaying a message of "winning abnormality occurs!" is shown. However, other than that, a warning sound or a lamp may be turned on, and a different mode of notification may be given according to the preset importance of abnormality). Then, after the specific display change notification is continuously given for a predetermined period, the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes) as shown in FIG. 57(c). In the illustrated example, the abnormality notification is erased at the timing of FIG. 57C, but the abnormality notification may be continuously performed until the operation of canceling the abnormality notification is performed. May be. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to notify the abnormality even within the predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (changed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  FIG. 58 shows an example of effect operation in the case where effect setting is made by the player at the timing "X" shown in FIG. Specifically, an example in which the player performs an operation to increase the volume of the effect at the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 52 (timing after the specific display change notification in the specific display effect). Shows. As shown in FIG. 58A, when the effect setting is performed at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 52 after the specific display change notification is given (when the operation by the player is detected), it is shown in FIG. It is determined that the effect setting is performed in step S9077, and the effect setting process is performed in the process of step S9078. Then, by the processing, it is notified that the volume setting has been changed as shown in FIG. 58B (in the example shown, the volume has been changed from "6" to "7") (setting change notification). ), the process of increasing the volume output by the effect is performed. Then, after the specific display change notification is continuously given for a predetermined period, the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes) as shown in FIG. 57(c). As shown in the figure, it is desirable that the notification that the volume setting has been changed is displayed in such a manner that the specific display change notification and the specific display are not unrecognizable to the player. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the effect-related settings within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (changed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from decreasing. When the abnormality notification and the setting change notification are performed in the same period, the abnormality notification may be prioritized (eg, the layer of the abnormality notification may be set to be closer to the player than the layer of the setting change). .. Furthermore, depending on the type of abnormality, some may be prioritized over the setting change notification and others may not be prioritized.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the following effects can be achieved.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines, as the execution timing of the specific display effect, the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap. Therefore, the execution of the failure effect is limited in a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display is changed) is prevented, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is prevented. Further, the timing set before the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect may not be selectable as the execution timing of the specific display effect, whereby the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes. Since the execution of the failure effect is limited after the notification of "Yes" is performed, it is possible to further prevent the game enjoyment from being deteriorated. In addition, when the specific display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed, and when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success, a specific display change that notifies that the icon as the specific display is displayed The notification is continuously given for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S90603 of FIG. 44 (the specific display changes). The effect control CPU 90120 determines, as the execution timing of the specific display effect, the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap. Therefore, the execution of the failure production is limited during the period from the time when success is shown as the production result of the predetermined production until the icon is displayed (the specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Moreover, when performing the specific display effect, the effect control CPU 90120 determines icons (combinations of icons) to be displayed at different rates according to the variable display result. Therefore, the player's attention can be paid to which icon is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the notice effect. Therefore, the execution of the notice effect is restricted in a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display is changed) can be restricted, and the reduction of the effect can be prevented. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can notify the abnormality even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 90120 can perform effect-related settings within a predetermined period after being notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from decreasing. Moreover, when the setting related to the effect is performed, the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that the setting related to the effect has been changed (setting change notification). Therefore, the effect of production can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and one described in the above-described embodiment can solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. It may have a partial structure. Moreover, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above-described embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, the predetermined effect as the mini game is described as always indicating success, but the effect result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the predetermined effect of the mode shown in FIG. 54 and the like is performed is shown, but there may be a plurality of modes of the predetermined effect. For example, as shown in FIG. May compete with each other (perform a race effect). FIG. 59 shows an example of a production operation when a race production is performed as the predetermined production. Specifically, each runner is distinguished by its color. Each runner has a degree of expectation as to whether or not the predetermined performance is successful. There are blue, green, red, and rainbow as the colors of each runner. The success expectation is high in the order of rainbow> red> green> blue, and the race production is the character of two runners with different success expectations (here , Which are distinguished by color) perform a race (race), and either one wins, so that the success or failure of the predetermined performance is notified (the success expectation of the winning runner is Be notified as a jackpot expectation). Note that the race effect may be performed multiple times. The green and blue runners with relatively low success expectations as a result of the prescribed effect belong to the first group, and the rainbow and red runners with relatively high success expectations as a result of the prescribed effect belong to the second group. Shall belong. Note that the race effect is an effect that allows one of the runners to win, and is also a type of selection effect that selects one of the runners. In the race production, both runners who appear may cancel the race (a mode in which neither runner is selected).

  In this example, the ratio of both runners canceling the race in the race effect in which at least one of the blue runner and the green runner belonging to the first group in which the success degree of success of the predetermined effect is relatively low appears (first stop ratio) ), the race effect in which the red runners and the rainbow runners belonging to the second group with a relatively high success expectation of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 59 appears (that is, blue and green belonging to the first group). In the race production in which no runners appear, the ratio of both runners canceling the race (second cancellation ratio) is set higher. Accordingly, even when the success degree of success of the predetermined effect is low, the race effect in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In particular, the ratio of "miss" is usually higher than the ratio of "big hit" in the variable display result, and the effect result as the predetermined effect is often unsuccessful (assuming that the specific display effect is executed). In many cases, the result of the specified performance may be unsuccessful.) With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the race performance in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear, and the player Since it is expected that the success expectation of the predetermined effect is high every time the race effect in which the runner and the rainbow runner appear is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. When a selection effect such as a race effect (as described above, a race effect is a type of selection effect) is executed, conventionally, when an option is not selected from the presented options (runner color). , A production with a high expectation of success (high expectation), which is not usually selected, was executed. However, as described above, since the variable display result is rarely a "big hit", the result as the predetermined effect is often unsuccessful. Therefore, the player comes into contact with the high-expectation effect. This is rare, and the effect of production is not enhanced. Therefore, due to the above-mentioned race effects (effects that both runners cancel) and the relationship between the first cancellation ratio and the second cancellation ratio, high expectations are suggested (red runners and rainbow runners appear. Because the race effect) is easily executed, the effect of the effect is enhanced.

  In addition, in this example, the above-mentioned race effect is executed as an example of the predetermined effect as the mini game, and the effect that notifies the success expectation degree of the predetermined effect is shown as an example, but the race effect is not the predetermined effect in the specific display effect. Alternatively, it may be executed as an effect of notifying the jackpot expectation degree of the variable display being executed (the effect of notifying the jackpot expectation degree of the winning runner as the jackpot expectation degree of this time). According to this, it is possible to execute a race effect in which the red runners and the rainbow runners belonging to the second group, which have a relatively high jackpot expectation degree, appear even in the variable display with a low jackpot expectation degree. Can be increased.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the icon as the special image is displayed as the specific display effect is shown, but in addition to the icon being displayed as the specific display effect, as described above, the meter is used as the specific display effect. You may perform the effect which changes a display (increases in steps). Further, an effect (active display change effect) of changing the mode of active display corresponding to the variable display in accordance with the specific display effect may be performed. Furthermore, during the reach effect of super reach (super reach effect), the mode of active display and the mode of specific display may be changed to a special mode. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. Specifically, in the active display change effect in this example, the display modes of the active display are changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to “first mode (blue)”, “second mode (green)” and “third mode”. It suffices if it can be displayed by changing to "mode (red)". When the final display mode of the meter display as the specific display is the "first stage" or the "second stage", the final display mode of the active display is "first mode (blue)", and the meter display When the final display mode of "is in the third stage" or "fourth stage", the final display mode of the active display is "second mode (green)", and the final display mode of the meter display is "10th stage". In the case of “stage”, the final display mode of active display is “third mode (red)”.

  FIG. 60 shows an active display change effect in which the specific display effect is performed, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first-stage display mode, and the active display changes to the first mode in accordance with the change in the meter display. The example of the production operation when it is performed is shown. As shown in FIG. 60A, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 60A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), when the specific display effect is executed, the effect of blinking and displaying the meter display 9090 is executed as the predetermined effect. Then, the character A 90200 appears (FIG. 60C), and the display mode of the meter display changes to the display mode of the first stage in which the color of one scale of 10 has changed (FIG. 60D). Then, in accordance with the change in the meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed to the first mode (in the example of FIG. 60(E), the color is shown by letters) and displayed (FIG. E)).

  Next, specific examples of the super reach effect, the specific display effect, and the active display change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. Of these, FIG. 61 shows an example of the effect operation when the super reach effect is executed independently (the specific display effect and the active display change effect are not executed). In addition, FIGS. 62 and 63 show an example of a production operation when the specific display production and the active display change production are executed when the super reach production is executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 61, a case where the super reach effect is independently executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 61A, when variable display of a decorative pattern is started in the image display device 905, active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 61A, active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the "left" decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 61(B), the "right" decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 61(C), and the left and right decorative patterns are displayed. Indicates that the same symbol (in this example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed, and the reach state occurs. Next, at the timing of development into super reach, a character display such as "Super reach!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 61(D), and racing of the racing car is started as shown in FIG. 61(E). Such effect display is started, and super reach effect is started. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 61D to 61G, in this embodiment, during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of effect symbols is reduced and displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen of the image display device 905. It shall be.

  Next, at a predetermined cut-in effect execution timing during execution of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the predetermined cut-in effect is executed during execution of the super reach effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 61(F), in the image display device 905, a predetermined character image 90201 different from the effect display of the racing of the racing car up to that time is cut in, and a line such as “Chance!” A predetermined cut-in effect is executed according to the display mode. In this example, the predetermined cut-in effect is a part of the super reach effect. Note that, for example, as in the above embodiment, the predetermined cut-in effect may be configured as an effect different from the super reach effect. Further, for example, the super reach effect may be interrupted and a predetermined cut-in effect may be executed.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 61(A), even when the super reach effect is independently executed, the meter display 9090 is also displayed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. However, when the predetermined cut-in effect is started, the meter display 9090 is erased as shown in FIG. 61(F). As such, in this example, the meter display 9090 is displayed at least until the predetermined cut-in effect is started, so the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect or the meter for changing the specific display mode to the special mode. It is possible to make it impossible to recognize which of the predetermined cut-in effect and the special change of the meter display is executed until the execution timing of the special change of the display (detailed later). It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the meter display changes due to a special change. Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the meter display 9090 may be continuously displayed even after the predetermined cut-in effect is started (however, the meter level does not change). Further, for example, when the super reach effect is executed independently and the special change of the meter display or the active display change effect is not executed, the meter display 9090 may not be displayed.

  Then, when a predetermined cut-in effect execution period has elapsed, the display of the racing car race is returned to again, and as shown in FIG. 61(G), an effect as if the teammate racing car finished first Display. Then, when the variable display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the same symbol (in this example, the symbol “7”) as the left and right ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed as the “middle” ornamental symbol, and the big hit symbol is displayed. Is derived and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, a case will be described in which a special change of meter display and an active display change effect are executed as the specific display effect when the super reach effect is executed. In the example of FIGS. 62 and 63, a special change of the meter display is executed as the specific display effect, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the display mode of the tenth stage, and the active display changes to the third mode in response to the change of the meter display. In addition, the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display of the third special display mode. In the specific display effect, normally, as shown in FIG. 60D, the display mode of the meter display changes to the first-stage display mode in which the color of one scale of 10 has changed. When the special change of the meter display is executed, the normal mode is changed to the display mode of the tenth stage. In this way, the special change of the meter display in the specific display effect is called a special change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 62A, active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), after the "left" decorative design is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the "right" decorative design is stopped and displayed, and "left" and "right" are displayed. The decorative pattern “” is stopped and displayed in the same design (design “7” in this example), and the reach state occurs. Next, at the timing of development into super-reach, a character display such as "Super-reach!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 62(D), and a racing car race is started as shown in FIG. 62(E). Such effect display is started, and super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 62(D) to (I) and FIG. 63(J), in this example, during execution of the super reach effect and during execution of the special change effect, the right side of the display screen of the image display device 905. The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced at the lower end. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), immediately before the specific display effect is started, the notification effect of blinking the meter display 9090 is executed.

  Next, after the start of the super reach effect, at the execution timing of the special change effect as the specific display effect, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the special change effect is executed in the image display device 905 in such a manner as to perform an effect display as if a storm has arrived and a thunder is ringing. In this example, the special change effect is different from the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(H), in the image display device 905, an effect display as if a lightning strike hits the meter display 9090, and the display mode of the meter display as the specific display is 10. The display mode changes to the tenth stage display mode in which the colors of all of the scales have changed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 62(H), the example in which the display mode of the 10th stage is changed in which the colors of all the scales are changed is shown, but the display mode of the 10th stage may not be changed at once. For example, while suspending the super reach effect or executing it in a layer with low priority, perform a dedicated mini game effect for changing the display mode, and change to any stage depending on the result of the mini game effect. You may make it different. Further, the display mode may be changed stepwise by continuously performing the mini game production.

  Then, the super reach effect is resumed, and as shown in FIG. 62(I), the display of the racing car is again returned to and the active display mode is changed to the third mode (Fig. In the example of 62(I), the color is indicated by a character). Next, as shown in FIG. 63(J), an effect display as if the teammate's racing car finished in 1st place is performed, and the meter display and the active display are the special display of the third special display mode (“V”). Is changed to a special display 202) indicating the character of. Then, when the variable display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 63(K), the same design as the design symbol on the left and right (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed as the "medium" decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol is displayed. Is derived and displayed.

  In this example, a racing car race effect is displayed as a super-reach effect, a predetermined character image 90201 is cut in as a predetermined cut-in effect, and a storm arrives and a thunder strikes as a special change effect. Although the case where the effect display is performed as if it is ringing is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a super reach effect, a battle effect in which an enemy and an ally character battle each other may be performed, or a moving image of a predetermined story may be displayed, and various effect modes are possible. Further, for example, a button effect accompanied by a button operation may be executed as the predetermined cut-in effect, and a display different from the effect display up to that point during the super reach effect may be cut in in some form. .. Further, for example, as the special change effect, an effect display in which a character different from the meter display change effect appears, or a button effect accompanied by a button operation may be executed, and various effect modes are possible.

  According to this, it is possible to display a display (in this example, a meter display) that indicates the degree of expectation by changing the mode in a plurality of steps as the specific display. In addition, when a specific effect (super reach effect in this example) is executed, a special change effect (a special change in meter display in the specific display effect in this example) for changing the mode of the specific display can be executed. Is. Further, in this case, the special change effect can be executed in a manner prior to the specific effect (in this example, the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed). Therefore, since the aspect of the specific display can be changed in a manner prior to the specific effect, it is possible to pay attention to the change of the aspect of the specific display even when the specific effect is executed. That is, if both the specific effect and the change in the mode of the specific display are executed, the player may pay attention to the specific effect and may not be able to sufficiently pay attention to the change in the mode of the specific display. Since the aspect of the specific display can be changed according to the aspect described above, the change of the aspect of the specific display can be noticed even when the specific effect is executed. In addition, in this example, an example in which the effect of changing the meter display (incrementally increasing) is executed as the specific display effect and the active display change effect is performed in accordance with the specific display effect has been described. Instead of this, the icon shown in the above embodiment may be displayed. For example, when displaying icons in a stepwise manner, when a special change of the meter display is executed as the specific display effect and the display mode of the 10th step is changed from the normal mode, the display mode of the active display is the third mode. Instead of being displayed in a different manner (in the example of FIG. 62(I), the color is shown by letters), the icon is displayed in the highest stage manner (the manner in which the jackpot expectation is highest). May be.

  In this example, the display mode of the active display changes according to the change of the meter display. However, for example, the display mode of any of the hold displays changes according to the change of the meter display. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it may be realized by associating and executing the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display and the specific display effect (including the special change effect) based on the command at the time of the start winning. Specifically, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the hold display are determined based on the command at the time of starting winning, and the effect is executed based on the determination result. In the case where the display mode of any of the hold displays changes corresponding to the meter display, in the period from the time when the hold display is displayed until the corresponding variable display is started, the specific display effect ( (Including special change effects) may be executable.

  In addition, for example, when the display mode of the hold display can be changed by the look-ahead effect, and when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode is changed to the active mode. The display may be displayed. Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display). .. Further, in this case, the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change of the meter display, and the active display succeeding the display mode of the hold display may change according to the further change of the meter display. Good. In this case, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the active display may be determined on the basis of the command at the time of the start winning, at the time of the start winning, or in the variable display start setting process. Good. Further, in this case, the specific display effect (including the special change effect) may be executable during the period from the time when the hold display is displayed until the corresponding variable display ends.

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to set the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed, and the volume of the effect is changed as an example of the setting related to the effect. However, the setting relating to the effect is not limited to this. The setting relating to the effect may be performed as long as it is performed based on the operation by the player, and for example, the selection of the output music or the type of the background may be changed. Further, the setting relating to the effect may include setting the function of the auto button to be valid or invalid.

  Note that the "auto button" is a function that executes the process assuming that the push button 9031B is operated, although the push button 9031B is not actually operated by the player. In this example, the button advance notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the advance notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single-shot operation or the repeated hit operation of the push button 9031B in the button advance notice effect. When the function is set to be valid, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the processing is executed assuming that the push button 9031B is single-shot operation or continuous hit operation in the button advance notice effect, and the advance notice display is displayed. .. In this example, the single-shot operation means that the push button 9031B is operated once, and the continuous hitting operation means that the push button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times.

  Further, in this embodiment, “automatic continuous hit” means that the push button 9031B is actually continuously pressed (long-pressed) by the player. However, the push button 9031B is pressed multiple times. It is a function of detecting that the button is continuously pressed (continuously pressed (a state in which the push button 9031B is pressed and a state in which the push button 9031B is not pressed is repeated a plurality of times)). In this example, when the function of the auto button is invalid, the notice display may be displayed based on the detection of the repeated hitting operation of the push button 9031B in the button notice effect, but the push button 9031B is pressed for a long time. Also in this case, the notice display is displayed as if the repeated hit operation was detected.

  In this example, by performing the effect setting process of step S9078 of FIG. 41, arbitrary timing (for example, the period during the customer waiting demonstration display or the period during which the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed, during the big hit game) During a certain period), it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button based on the operation of the push button 9031B by the player. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 58, an example in which the player changes the volume setting at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 52, but instead of the volume setting, the function of the auto button is enabled as the effect setting. It is also possible to set whether or not to set. That is, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button within a predetermined period after being notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed. It should be noted that it is possible to display whether the auto button is valid or invalid within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed. Note that, in this example, the automatic continuous hitting function is always valid, but it may be configured to be enabled or disabled like the function of the automatic button.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the function of the auto button is set to be valid or invalid. In FIG. 64, the aspect of the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2) and (3). Note that, in the case of FIG. 64(1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is disabled. As shown in FIG. 64(1), when the player presses and holds the push button 9031B while the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, as shown in FIG. 64(2), the auto button is pressed. While the function is set to be valid, a character string such as “auto button enabled” is displayed on the image display device 905, and a message indicating that the function of the auto button is set is displayed. At this time, control for outputting the auto button effective sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R and control for causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the special light emission mode may be performed.

  Further, when the player presses the push button 9031B (single shot operation) while the auto button function is set to be valid, the auto button function is disabled as shown in FIG. 64(3). And a character string such as “auto button disabled” is displayed on the image display device 905, and a message indicating that the auto button function is disabled is displayed. At this time, the control for outputting the automatic button invalid effect sound from the speakers 908L, 908R and the control for causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode may be performed.

  In the example of FIG. 64, the setting of the auto button function is changed while the decorative design is variably displayed, but as described above, the same operation is performed so that the decorative design is not limited to the variable display. The setting of the auto button function can be changed even during the customer waiting demonstration period and the big hit game period. Note that, for example, even when the setting of the auto button function is changed from the menu screen, similar to the example shown in FIG. 64, a display indicating that the auto button function is disabled or enabled is displayed on the image display device 905. Control to output the automatic button invalid sound effect or the automatic button effective sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and to control the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode or the special light emission mode. May be.

  Next, a description will be given of the difference between a case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by a long press operation and a case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by an auto button function. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation and automatic continuous hitting by an automatic button function. In the example shown in FIG. 65, it is assumed that execution of the button advance notice effect A is decided as the button advance notice effect.

  In the "button notice effect A" and the "button notice effect B", when the operation valid period is started, a gauge display corresponding to the number of times the push button 9031B is operated is displayed, and the operation of the push button 9031B is detected. Each time, the display is updated so that the scale of the gauge display is decreased by one. Then, when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number (that is, when the scale on the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied, and an advance notice is displayed (for example, "Extreme heat!" or "Chance!" Character string) is displayed.

  When the function of the auto button is invalid and the execution of the button advance notice effect A is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button advance notice effect, the long press operation is started. After 4 seconds have elapsed, the detection by the automatic repeated hits is started, and during the detection by the automatic repeated hits, it is treated that the number of operations by the push button 9031B increases by 1 every 1.0 seconds. Further, when the execution of the button advance notice effect B is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button advance notice effect, the automatic operation is performed when 2 seconds have elapsed since the long press operation was started. The detection by repeated hits is started, and during the detection by automatic continuous hits, it is treated as the number of operations by the push button 9031B is increased by one every 0.5 seconds. It should be noted that regardless of whether the button advance notice effect A or the button advance notice effect B is executed, when the normal continuous hit operation of the push button 9031B is performed, each time the push operation of the push button 9031B is detected. It is treated as if the number of operations was increased by one.

  Further, if the function of the auto button is valid, when the button notice effect A is executed, 1.0 second has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period even if the push button 9031B is not pressed and held. Each time the push button 9031B is operated, it is treated as if the number of operations by the push button 9031B is increased by one. Further, when the button advance notice effect B is executed, even if the push button 9031B is not pressed for a long time, the number of times the push button 9031B is operated every 0.5 seconds from the start of the operation valid period. It is treated as one increment. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the button advance notice effect C is executed, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, a predetermined timing in the middle of the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period is 6 seconds). Is reached, it is treated as if the push button 9031B has been operated once.

  Note that, for example, depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic continuous hit start time and the automatic continuous hit detection period may be selected from a plurality of options at different rates. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the auto continuous hit start time is determined to be 0 seconds at a rate of 50% and 2 seconds at a rate of 50%. May be determined to be 0 seconds at a rate of 70% and 2 seconds at a rate of 30%. When the variable display result is "big hit", the automatic continuous hit detection interval is determined to be 0.5 seconds at a rate of 70% and 1 second at a rate of 30%. In this case, the ratio of 50% may be set to 0.5 seconds, and the ratio of 50% may be set to 1 second. In addition, depending on whether or not the variable display result is "big hit", there are different ratios for selecting the automatic continuous hit start time and the automatic continuous hit detection period from multiple options. It may be applied only to either one of the automatic continuous hits by, or both.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 65(A), in the case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by a long press operation, a predetermined start waiting period after the long press operation of the push button 31 is started after the start of the operation valid period. After (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed, the continuous stroke determination is turned on (that is, the processing is executed assuming that the continuous stroke operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(B), when automatic continuous hitting by the auto button function is performed, the continuous hit determination is turned on immediately after the start of the operation valid period (that is, the operation valid period Immediately after the start, the process is executed as if the continuous stroke operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced). With this configuration, when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed, the effect (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display is reduced. ) Can be performed at different timings, and the staging effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, in this example, when the execution of the button advance notice effect B is determined, when the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation is performed, the long press operation of the push button 9031B is performed after the start of the operation valid period. If the continuous hit determination is turned on after the lapse of a predetermined start standby period (2 seconds in this example) from the start, and if automatic continuous hits are performed by the auto button function, the continuous hits are immediately performed after the start of the operation valid period. Judgment turns on. Therefore, in each of the button notice effects A and B, the effect is produced when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. The timing (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display) is configured to be different.

  In the above embodiment, for ease of understanding, the description has been made assuming that the predetermined effect as the mini game always indicates success, but the effect result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure, and execution of the predetermined effect may be performed. The ratio of the success of the effect of the predetermined effect may be changed depending on the timing. Specifically, since the execution timing of the predetermined effect differs depending on the execution timing of the specific display effect, it suffices that the rate at which the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success varies depending on the execution timing of the specific display effect. In addition, for example, even when the specific display effect is executed at the execution timing of “timing 1” shown in FIG. 48, the predetermined effect may be executed at a plurality of timings. The proportion of the success of the effect result may be changed according to. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the start timing of the predetermined effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which the ratio of the variable display result being a “big hit” varies depending on the combination of icons displayed as the specific display, but this is an example. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing an active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display and a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the active display and the hold display, and The rate at which the variable display result is “big hit” may be different depending on the combination with the display mode (the number or combination of icons) of the display. According to this, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the icon as the specific display is displayed by determining the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the notice effect (the specific display is Although an example is shown in which execution of the notice effect is limited in a predetermined period after being notified that it changes), for example, although the notice effect is limited, the jackpot expectation of one notification is extremely high (here , "Big hit" confirmed) Special effects can be executed, and the special effects are not limited even in a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Good. In this case, as for the execution timing of the special effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 51A, the execution of the special effect is referred to by referring to a table in which the execution period of the specific display effect is not selectable. The timing may be determined from a plurality of timings. Note that the special effect may be an effect in which the hold display is changed by the operation of the player, other than the one-time notification. According to this, the effect that is restricted and the effect that is not restricted are sharpened, and the effect can be improved. In addition, the example of limiting the execution of the notice effect includes not only the case of not executing (prohibiting) but also the case of being executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. In order to execute the notice production without prohibiting it, if the icon display as the specific display is given priority over the notice production (for example, the layer of the icon display is set to the player side over the notice production layer). Good. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty visually recognizing the specific display, and it is possible to improve the effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which the abnormality notification is possible even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is notified, but this is an example. In addition to the abnormality notification, it suffices that information regarding the game such as the hitting notification, the ball notification, and the fourth symbol can be appropriately notified as special notification. It should be noted that the payout notification displays the number of balls (the number of acquired balls) acquired by the player in a recognizable manner, and the special notification may be updated each time the number of acquired balls increases. Normally, the number of coins won is displayed during high base and is updated after a big hit, so it is updated within a predetermined period after being notified that an icon as a specific display will be displayed. Although not performed, the number of coins to be won may be updated for payout due to a game ball winning a winning opening during a high base, and it is applicable in such a case. Further, the present invention is also applicable to a gaming machine in which a variable display result is frequently set to "small hit" during a high base to increase the number of coins obtained by the player. According to this, it is possible to update the acquired payout number within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed, and it is possible to suitably notify the player of the acquired payout number. .. It should be noted that the hitting notification may be any notification such as a right hitting notification or a left hitting notification, as long as the player can recognize the area where the game ball is shot. Further, the fourth symbol may be, for example, a symbol that blinks a lamp so that the player can recognize whether or not it is variably displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the production control board 9012 of a variation pattern indicating a variation time and a variation mode such as the type of reach production and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, one variation pattern command is issued when the variation is started. Although the example of transmitting is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command to determine the presence or absence of pseudo-relation, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. before reaching (so-called when not reaching. A command indicating the change time and change mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery effect, etc., after the reach is reached (so-called the first when the reach is not reached). It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the variation time or variation mode after 2 stops). In this case, on the side of the effect control board 9012, effect control in the variable display may be performed based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the gaming control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variation time by each of two commands, and the production control board 9012 selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt (In) the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as a variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, or lighting patterns of each segment that is not limited to numbers and symbols are provided. An example of variably displaying is shown. However, the variable display result displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B and the special symbol that is variably displayed are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". It is not limited to the ones composed of the like. For example, the lighting pattern during the variable display of the special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and at least a part of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost symbol). What alternates and is also included in the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Further, the special symbol displayed during the variable display and the special symbol displayed as the variable display result may be different. As a variable display of the special symbol, for example, a display of blinking "-" is performed, and as a variable display result, other special symbols ("7" for "big hit", "1" for "miss", etc.) ) Is included in the variable display of special symbols. In addition, the variable display of the decorative design includes blinking display or scroll display of one type of decorative design. The lighting pattern in the variable display of the normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost design) Alternately repeating is also included in the variable display of ordinary symbols. Further, the decorative design or the normal design displayed during the variable display may be different from the decorative design or the normal design displayed as the variable display result.

  It should be noted that in the above-described embodiment, the ratio (including the determined ratio and the like, the same applies to the probability) may include 0%. That is, the ratio and the probability may be between 0 and 100%. For example, making one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is, for example, 30%, the other ratio is 70%, and the other ratio is, for example, 0% and the other ratio is 10%. Including that. Further, the sum of one ratio and the other ratio does not have to be 100% (there may be one that is not included in either one or the other, and may have a predetermined ratio). Further, when the ratio of the other is higher than the ratio of one, it includes setting one ratio to be 0% and the other ratio to be 100%. For example, in the above, making the determination rate of the variable display pattern in the specific period after the advantageous state different from the determination rate of the variable display pattern in the period other than the specific period means that the variable display pattern selected on one side is selected on the other side. It also includes the case that the variable display pattern selected on the one hand and the variable display pattern selected on the other hand partially overlap or do not completely overlap. These may be defined by the contents of the table that defines the ratio.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to the one that performs the probability variation control in which the jackpot type becomes “probability variation” when the jackpot symbol indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, for example, a game area. It is also possible to use a probability variation determination device type pachinko gaming machine in which probability variation control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area within the attacker provided in.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications are possible within the range not specified. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to the detection of winning balls, but encloses the gaming balls and responds to the detection of winning balls. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives points, or a game machine that controls a big hit game state when a specific passage gate is passed. Furthermore, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value (medals, etc.), and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified for each can be variably displayed. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which one game is completed by deriving the display result on the variable display device, and winning can be generated according to the display result derived on the variable display device.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in the storage device included in. Furthermore, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main Board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Ordinary symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening switch 23 Count switch 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 random number circuit 105, 125 I/O
120 CPU for production control
123 Display control unit 901 Pachinko gaming machine 902 Gaming board 903 Frame for gaming machine 904A, 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 908R Speaker 909 game Effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal pattern display 9021 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101 , 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 105, 125 I/O
90120 CPU for production control
90123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state,
A specific display means for performing a specific display capable of changing the display mode step by step according to the degree of advantage,
Special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game,
And a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that performs either a success effect or a failure effect after performing a common introduction effect,
The specific display means is capable of changing the display mode of the specific display when the effect of the predetermined effect is the specific result and a predetermined period of time has passed,
The special effect executing means executes the special effect in which the failure effect is performed during a period from when the effect result of the predetermined effect is shown to be a specific result to when the display mode of the specific display changes. Without, the special effect that the successful effect is performed is executable,
The special notification executing means,
Based on the fact that the abnormality is determined, it is possible to execute the abnormality notification as the special notification,
It is possible to start the abnormality notification even when the abnormality determination is performed in a predetermined period after being notified that the display result of the specific display becomes a specific result of the specific effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.